Architectural Technical Specifications Ph1 Pkg3

CONSTRUCTION OF
VARIOUS STRUCTURES
AND FACILITIES WITHIN
THE 100-HECTARE AT
BATAAN TECHNOLOGY
PARK
(BTP PHASE I PACKAGE 3)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ARCHITECTURAL
FOR BIDDING
OCTOBER 2021
TABLE OF CONTENT
Item No. Description Page No.
100 GENERAL PARAGRAPHS 1

SOIL TREATMENT 4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 6
807 LANDSCAPPING 16
1002 PLUMBING FIXTURES 24
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 28
1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS 33
LINEAR CEILING SYSTEM 44
SPANDREL METAL CEILING PANEL 47
TOILET PARTITION AND URINAL SCREENS 49
WOOD PLASTIC COMPOSITE FLUTED PANEL 52
1004 FINISH HARDWARE 58
1005 STEEL LOUVER WINDOWS AND VENTS 66
1006 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 69
STEEL LOUVER DOORS AND FRAMES 77
1007 ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOOOR 86
1008 ALUMINUM WINDOW 91
1010 FLUSH DOORS 105
1007 FRAMELESS GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 114
1012 GLAZING 119
1014 PREFORMED METAL RIB TYPE ROOFING 123
1016 CEMENTITIOUS CAPILLARY/CRYSTALLINE 128
WATERPROOFING
CONCRETE SEALER 132
ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 135
INTEGRAL CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 143
(CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING BY CRYSTALLIZATION)
MODIFED MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 147
1018 CERAMIC TILE 151
GRANITE WORKS 156
1020 LAMINATED WOOD STRIP FLOORING 164
PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING 167
RESILIENT FLOORING – VINYL TILES 171
SPECIALTY TILE-ANTI STATIC VINYL TILES 175
VINYL COATED WALL COVERING 179
1021 CONCRETE FLOORING TOPPING 184
NON-METALLIC FLOOR HARDENER 189
PLAIN CEMENT FLOORING STRAIGHT TO FINISH 191
1027 PLASTERING 194
STONE WALL CLADDING WORKS 202
1030 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 206
SOUND CONTROL WALL TREATMENT 212
1032 CHEMICAL RESISTANT EPOXY COATING 216
EPOXY COATING 220
PAINTING OF BUILDING (FIELD PAINTING) 223
SEALANT AND CAULKING 232
1034 DAMPPROOFING 239
1035 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM 241
1036 SKYLIGHT AND FRAMES 244
1038 BUILDING INSULATION 246
1039 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS 249
1041 FIBER CEMENT BOARD 252
GYPSUM BOARD 258
1046 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (NON LOAD BEARING) 263
LIGHT WEIGHT WALL PANEL SYSTEM 270
1047 DRAPERY AND CURTAIL HARDWARE 274
FLAGPOLES 276
GARBAGE CHUTE 279
MISCELLANEOUS METALS 282
SUNSHADE SCREEN 288
1051 HANDRAILS AND RAILING 291
1053 CARPET TILE FLOORING 301
1203 PASSENGER ELEVATOR 306
CONSTRUCTION OF VARIOUS STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES WITHIN THE 100-HECTARE OCT 2021
AREA AT BATAAN TECHNOLOGY PARK For Bid
BTP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – CIVIL (PHASE I PACKAGE 3)
ITEM 100 GENERAL PARAGRAPHS
100.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Project Information
1.1.1 The work shall conform to the following contract drawings, details and maps, all of
which form part of the specifications.
1.1.2 Omissions from the drawings or specifications or the misdescription of details of work
which are manifestly necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and
specifications, or which are customarily performed shall not relieve the Contractor
from performing such omitted or misdescribed details of the work but they shall be
performed as if fully and correctly set forth and described on the drawings and
specifications.
1.1.3 The contractor shall check all drawings furnished him immediately upon their receipt
and shall promptly notify the project Manager of any discrepancies. Figures marked on
the drawings shall be followed in preference to scale measurements. Large scale
drawings shall govern small scale drawings. The Contractor shall compare all drawings
and verify the figures before laying out the work and will be responsible for any errors
which might have been avoided thereby.
1.1.4 All drawings issued for construction to General Contractor/s, Sub-contractors shall be
furnished solely by the architects.
1.1.5 Physical Data: The physical conditions indicated on the drawings and on the
specifications are the result of site investigations by surveys and soil investigations
conducted. However, it is expressly understood that the Architect/Designers will not
be responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn there from.
100.2 SUBMITTALS
2.1 Proposed Material Submittals, Catalog Data and Samples
2.1.1 Proposed material submittals required of the Contractor shall be submitted within 90
calendar days after notice to proceed to allow sufficient time for processing, review,
approval and procurement before the Contractor is ready to use the materials. No
material shall be used prior to written approval.
2.1.2 The Contractor shall furnish the name and address of the manufacturer of each item of
material and equipment. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a cover letter signed
by the Contractor.
2.1.3 The Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies for approval, giving full information, such
as identifying description, catalog numbers, catalog cuts, and data sheets as maybe
Page | 1
required for all materials and equipment designated in the technical sections of this
specification so as to identify clearly the use for which it is intended. Data submitted
in a bound volume in the same numerical as specification paragraphs.
2.1.4 The Contractor shall certify on all submittals that the material being proposed conforms
to the contract requirements. In the event of any variance, the Contractor shall state
specifically which portions vary, and the request approval of a substitute. Incomplete
submittals and submittal with inadequate data will be rejected.
2.2 Drawing
2.2.1 Before starting the fabrication or installation of any of this work, the Contractor shall
submit drawings as may be required and designated in the technical sections of this
specification.
2.2.2 In addition to the drawings designated in the technical sections, the Contractor shall
furnish any and all sketches, drawings, and/or diagrams used in connection with the
completion of the architect thru the Project Manager. Drawings submitted for review
or approval shall be clearly identified as their intended use in the project.
2.2.3 The Contractor shall prepare at his own expense and submit with such promptness as
to the cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor doing work on
the same building, on one (1) reproducible print and two (2) blue print copy in A0 or
other applicable standard size as required including all necessary corrections relating
to artistic effect. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect,
file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed.
2.2.4 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirement of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop drawings,
Product data or samples unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect has given
written approval to the specific deviation.
2.2.5 The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the
Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect’s approval thereof.
2.2.6 No portion of the work requiring submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Sample shall be commended until the submittal has been approved by the Architect.
All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
2.2.7 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance: Before delivery, manufacturer’s

certifications shall be furnished by the Contractor as required by the technical
specifications. Pre-printed certifications will not be acceptable; all certifications shall
be in original. The original of all manufacturers’ certifications shall name the
appropriate items of equipment or material, specifications, standard, or other document
specified as controlling the quality of that item and shall have attached thereto certified
Page | 2
copies of test data upon which the certifications are based. All certificates shall be
signed by the manufacturer’s official authorized to sign certificates of conformance.
2.2.8 Laboratory Reports: An independent testing agency will be selected to conduct

specified tests, inspection services and prepare laboratory reports. Reports shall cite
the contract requirements, the test or analysis procedures used, the actual test results,
and the state that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to the
specification requirements.
2.2.9 All test reports shall be signed by representative of the testing laboratory authorized to
sign certified test reports. In case test results fail to meet specified requirements,
additional test shall be conducted until such requirement is achieved. Costs incurred
by retesting shall be shouldered by the Contractor.
2.2.10 Architect’s Review of Submittals: Architect will review Shop Drawings, Product Data,
and Samples with reasonable promptness upon Architect’s receipt and will apply
Architect’s stamp thereto. Notations by Architect which would increase contract cost
or time of completion shall be brought to Architect’s attention before proceeding with
the work. Each submittal will be stamped indicating appropriate action as follows:
a. “Approved” – means that fabrication, manufacture or construction may

proceed providing submittal which complies with Architect’s notations and
Contract Documents.
b. “Approved with Comments” – means that fabrication, manufacture or

construction may proceed providing submittal which complies with Architect’s
notations and Contract Documents. If, for any reason, Contractor cannot
comply with notations, Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit as
described for submittals stamped “Revise and Resubmit”.
c. “Revise and Resubmit” – means that submittal did not fully demonstrate the
full extent of all conditions, details or coordination with other surrounding
work and therefore requires additional information and rework as noted. These
shop drawings shall be submitted for final “Approved” or “Approved with
Comments”. Specific areas requiring additional information shall not be
fabricated, manufactured, or constructed prior to resubmission.
d. “Disapproved” – means that submittal does not comply with design intent of
Contract Documents. Submittals stamped “Disapproved” are not to be used.
Contractor shall make revisions and Resubmit.
Page | 3
ITEM 100 SOIL TREATMENT
100.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including equipment, and
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application and effective
implementation of soil treatment as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Qualifications
Soil treatment shall be performed by an experienced pest control operator whose

principal business in extermination and treatment and who has at least five (5) years of
successful operation in this field. Upon request, evidence of such qualifications shall
be submitted for approval prior to beginning any of this work.
1.3 Warranty
Upon completion of the soil treatment and as a condition of final acceptance, the
contractor shall furnish to the owner, in writing and in acceptable form, a warranty
covering the effectiveness of the soil treatment against termite infestation for a period
of not less than five (5) years from the date of final treatment. Upon notice by the
owner during the warranty period, the contractor shall promptly provide such a
treatment as may be necessary for the elimination and control of infestation, and shall
repair all damage resulting there from at his expense.
1.4 Delivery and Storage
Soil treatment materials shall be delivered to project site in sealed and labeled containers
as supplied by manufacturer. The label shall be complete with application and safety
instructions and bear the FPA/FDA registration number. Temporary storage of
insecticides utilized at the project site shall be allowed subject to standard environmental
safety requirement.
100.2 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 Soil Treatment
Soil treatment shall be consistent with approved chemicals and concentrations.
2.1.1 Preferred and acceptable Products:
a. Bayer or approved equal
2.1.2 Preferred and acceptable Pest Control System:
Page | 4
a. Julant or approved equal
100.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Soil Conditions
The soil shall be in friable condition with sufficient low moisture content to allow
uniform distribution of chemicals throughout and avoid surface flow of treatment from
the site. Surface flow of treatment toward individual water supplied shall be avoided.
3.2 Preparation
All footings, foundation walls, piers, undergoing piping, backfilling and soil compaction
shall be completed prior to treatment. Application of chemicals shall not be made until
all preparation for placing of slabs and other structures have been completed.
3.3 Application
Perform the work in such a manner as to provide uniform distribution of chemicals

throughout the soil as specified. All soil which is distributed after treatment and before
placement of slabs and other covering structures shall be retreated as specified herein.
Chemicals shall be applied at least twelve (12) hours prior to placing of concrete and
other structures which will be in direct contact with the treated soil. Where concrete slabs
and other structures are to be placed over vapor barrier or damp proofing membrane, oil
solutions shall be used under concrete slabs or in locations where the solutions may come
in contact with vapor barriers.
100.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
All works performed under this Item shall be measured per unit actually applied with soil
treatment and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
100.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Soil treatment is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based
at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing
all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment shall be made under:
PAY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

NO.
100 Soil Treatment sq.m.
Page | 5
ITEM 100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
100.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Definitions
1.1.1 Types of Submittals
All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal Descriptions".

Submittals also are grouped as follows:
a. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and

other data prepared specifically for this contract, by contractor or through
contractor by way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or
other lower tier contractor, to illustrate portion of work.
b. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules,

performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's
descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate portion of work,
but not prepared exclusively for this contract.
c. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or

workmanship that are physically identical to portion of work, illustrating
portion of work or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished
work or both.
d. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure

that administrative requirements of project are adequately met but not to ensure
directly that work is in accordance with design.
1.2 Submittal Identification
Submittals required are identified by as follows:
Preconstruction Submittals
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
Construction Progress Schedule
Submittal schedule
Health and safety plan.
Work plan.
Quality control plan
Shop Drawings
1.2.1 Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of
the work.
Page | 6
1.2.2 Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the
product and as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the
project.
1.2.3 Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and
interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
1.2.4 Product Data
1.2.4.1 Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and
brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials
or equipment for some portion of the work.
1.2.5 Samples
1.2.5.1 Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional

and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which
the work can be judged
1.2.5.2 Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line to be used in selecting or
approving colors for the project.
1.2.5.3 Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by
which the ensuring work can be judged. Include assemblies or portions of assemblies
which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at
conclusion of the work.
1.2.6 Design Data
1.2.6.1 Calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work.
1.2.7 Test Reports
1.2.7.1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or
system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in
accord with specified requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date
of contract award for the project).
1.2.7.2 Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on
an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to
job site. Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken
from the job site, on portion of work during or after installation.
1.2.7.3 Final acceptance test and operational test procedure
Page | 7
1.2.8 Certificates
1.2.8.1 Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or

material attesting that product, system or material meet specification requirements.
Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project.
1.2.8.2 Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or subcontractor through

Contractor, the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion
of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
1.2.8.3 Confined space entry permits. Manufacturer's Instructions
1.2.8.4 Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material,

including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances,
hazards and safety precautions.
1.2.9 Factory test reports
1.2.10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1.2.10.1 Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals.
1.2.11 Closeout Submittals
1.2.11.1 Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or

to establish an administrative mechanism
1.2.12 As-built drawings
1.2.12.1 Posted operating instructions
1.2.13 Approving Authority
1.2.13.1 Person authorized to approve submittal.
1.2.14 Work
1.2.14.1 As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract
documents, including labor necessary to produce construction and materials, products,
equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses submit submitted
register. Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals.
Page | 8
1.3.2 Contractor Action Code and Action Code
Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form)

NR - Not Received
AN - Approved as noted
A - Approved
RR - Disapproved, Revise, and Resubmit
1.4 Procedures for Submittal
1.4.1 Reviewing, Certifying, and Approving Authority
1.4.1.1 Approving authority on submittals is QC manager unless otherwise specified for

specific submittal.
1.4.2 Constraints
a. Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of

this section, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
b. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of Work;

components of definable feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at
same time.
b. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or

materials included in separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be returned
without review.
c. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply

approval of assembly in which item functions.
1.4.3 Scheduling
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with

performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing.
Allow for potential requirements to resubmit.
b. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with receipt by

approving authority that includes at least fifteen (15) working days for submittals
for approval. Period of review for each re-submittal is the same as for initial
submittal.
1.4.4 Variations: Variations from contract requirements require approval and will be
considered where advantageous to the owner.
Page | 9
1.4.4.1 Considering Variations: Discussion with owner's representative prior to submission

will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections
and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost, consider
submission of the variation as a Change Proposal.
1.4.4.2 Proposing Variations: When proposing variation, deliver written request to the
Owner's Representative, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation
and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to the Owner. If lower cost is a benefit,
also include an estimate of the cost saving. In addition to documentation required for
variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed
variation in all documentation.
1.4.4.3 Warranting That Variations Are Compatible: When delivering a variation for approval,
contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation,
if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.
1.4.4.4 Contractor’s Responsibilities
a. Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field construction criteria;

review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with
requirements of the work and contract documents.
b. Transmit submittals in accordance with schedule on approved Submittal

Register, and to prevent delays in the work, delays to the Owner, or delays to
separate contractors.
c. Advise Owner's Representative of variation, as required by paragraph entitled

"Variations."
d. Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by Owner's Representative. When

resubmitting disapproved transmittals or transmittals noted for re-submittal the
contractor shall provide copy of that previously submitted transmittal including
all reviewer comments.
e. Furnish additional copies of submittal when requested by the Owner's

Representative.
f. Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as
"approved," or "approved as noted", except to the extent that a portion of work
must be accomplished as basis of submittal.
1.4.5 QC Responsibilities:
a. Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each submittal.
Page | 10
b. Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with
requirements of work and contract documents.
c. Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and

compliance with contract documents.
d. Ensure that material is clearly legible.
e. Stamp each sheet of each submittal with certifying statement or approving

statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or on one sheet printed
on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only.
f. Sign certifying statement or approval statement.
g. Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the submittal
register at project site until final acceptance of all work by the Owner.
h. Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including contractor's copy

of approved samples.
1.4.6 Actions Possible: Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal is not required, or is

not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for
lack of review by contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action,
coordination, or change.
b. Submittals marked "approved" "approved as submitted" authorize

contractor to proceed with work covered.
c. Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approval except as noted;

resubmission not required" authorize contractor to proceed with work as noted
provided contractor takes no exception to the notations.
d. Submittals marked "revise and resubmit" or "disapproved" indicate

submittal is incomplete or does not comply with design concept or
requirements of the contract documents and shall be resubmitted with
appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until resubmitted is
approved.
1.5 Format of Submittals
1.5.1 Transmittal Form
Page | 11
Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to the Owner's
Representative. Transmit Submittals with transmittal form standard for project. The
transmittal form shall identity contractor, indicate date of submittal, and include
information prescribed by transmittal form and required in paragraph entitled
"Identifying Submittals." Process transmittal forms to record actions regarding sample
panels and sample installations.
1.5.2 Identifying Submittals
Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the following
information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each
submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically,
with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Construction contract number.
b. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.
c. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for

example, SD-10A, to indicate resubmission.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer

and any other second tier contractor associated with submittal.
e. Product identification and location in project.
1.5.3 Format for Product Data
a. Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume.
Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers for product
data.
b. Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted;

indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it
pertains.
c. Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal
requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as
developed specifically for project.
d. Provide product data in metric dimensions.
1.5.4 Format for Shop Drawings
Page | 12
a. Shop drawings shall not be less than A4 297 by 210 mm (8/2 by 11 inches nor
more than AO 1189 by 841 mm (30 by 42 inches).
b. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date* and revision numbers
and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph entitled "Identifying
Submittals."
c. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare

drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Shop drawing
dimensions shall be the same unit of measure as indicated on the contract
drawings. Identify materials and products for work shown.
1.5.5 Format of Samples
a. Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the

manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as
specified:
(1) Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.

(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 50 by 75 mm (2 by 3 inches): Built up
to A4 297 by 210 mm (8'/2 by 11 inches).
(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding A4 297 by 210 mm (8'/2 -by 11)
inches: Cut down to A4 297 by 210 mm (81/2 by 11) inches and
adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.
(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 250 mm (10 inches) length or
length to be supplied, if less than 250 mm (10 inches). Examples of
linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.
(5) Sample of Non-Solid Materials: 750 ml Pint. Examples of non-solid
materials are sand and paint.
(6) Color Selection Samples: 50 by 100 mm (2 by 4 inches).
(7) Sample Panel: 1200 by 1200 mm (4 by 4 feet).
(8) Sample Installation: 10 square meters (100 square feet).
b. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due

to nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units
showing extremes and middle of range.
c. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified

or indicated. Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of
use.
d. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area

constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean-up of
project.
Page | 13
e. When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer

and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.
1.5.6 Format of Administrative Submittals
a. When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become

part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply contractor's
approval stamp to document, but to a separate sheet accompanying document.
b. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Include components required in that

section and the various technical sections.
c. Provide all dimensions in administrative submittals in metric. Where data are

included in preprinted material with inch-pound units only, submit metric
dimensions on separate sheet.
1.6 Quantity of Submittals
1.6.1 Number of Copies of Product Data:

Submit a minimum of four (4) copies of submittals of product data.
1.6.2 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for

product data.
1.6.3 Number of Samples:

a. Submit two (2) samples, or two (2) sets of samples showing range of variation,
of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained
by the Owner and one will be returned to contractor.
b. Submit one sample panel. Include components listed in technical section or as

directed.
d. Submit one sample installation, where directed. d. Submit one sample of non-
solid materials.
1.6.4 Number of Copies of Administrative Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, submit

administrative submittals compliance with quantity requirements specified for product
data.
1.7 Approved Submittals
The approval of submittals shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate
only that the general methods of construction, materials, detailing and other
information are satisfactory. Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the
Page | 14
responsibility for any error, which may exist, as the Contractor is responsible for
dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory
construction of all work. After submittals have been approved, no re-submittal for the
purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied
by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.
1.8 Disapproved Submittals
The Contractor shall make all corrections required and promptly furnish a corrected
submittal in the form and number of copies specified for the initial submittal.
1.9 Withholding of Payment
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals
have not been obtained.
1.10 General
The Contractor shall make submittals as required by the specifications. Units of

weights and measures used on all submittals shall be the same as those used in the
contract drawings. Each submittal shall be complete and in sufficient detail to allow,
ready determination of compliance with contract requirements. Proposed deviations
from the contract requirements shall be clearly identified. Submittals shall include
items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive
literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or
curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list);
certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals. Samples remaining upon
completion of the work shall be picked up and disposed of in compliance with existing
laws and regulations.
1.11 Submittal Register
1.12 Scheduling
Submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated
shall be scheduled to be coordinated and submitted concurrently. Certifications to be
submitted with the pertinent drawings shall be so scheduled. Adequate time shall be
allowed and shown on the register for review and approval. No delay damages or time
extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
1.13 Control of Submittals
The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to ensure that each
individual submittal is made on or before the contractor scheduled submittal date
shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
Page | 15
ITEM 807 LANDSCAPING WORKS
807.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including equipment, and
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of landscaping works
which also include soil preparation for the planting of plants, shrubs, and ground covers
as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Preconstruction Submittals: Written Notice of Plant Deliveries shall be submitted in

accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Delivery, Storage and Handling."
1.2.2 Samples: The following materials shall be submitted:
a. Topsoil
b. Commercial Fertilizer and Manure
c. Plants
d. Open-ground Shrubs
e. Pesticide Material
1.2.3 Operation and Maintenance Data: Prior to the end of the contract maintenance period,
copies of written instructions for year-round maintenance and care of the following
items shall be submitted:
a. Installed Shrubs
b. Installed Plants
c. Installed Ground Cover
1.3 Quality Assurance
During the guarantee period, plants that die or are in an unhealthy, unsightly, or badly
impaired condition shall be replaced as soon as is reasonably possible after the
unsatisfactory condition has become evident. No replacements shall be made in any
season definitely unfavorable for planting. At the conclusion of the guarantee period,
an inspection shall be conducted to determine the condition of plants. Plants not in a
healthy growing condition will be noted. As soon as seasonal conditions permit, plants
noted to be unhealthy, unsightly, or damaged shall be removed from the site and
replaced with healthy plants of the same kinds and sizes as originally specified. Such
replacements shall be made in the same manner as the original planting at no extra cost
to the owner.
1.3.1 General Planting Notes:
Page | 16
1. The landscape plans shall be read in conjunction with all relevant

Architectural, Engineering and all other related drawings and documents.
2. Contractor shall stake out planting areas for approval by the Landscape
Architect before proceeding with the plant material delivery and installation.
Planting locations are schematic and approximate only.
3. The illustrated number of plants shown in the Planting Plan supersedes the
estimated number in the Plant List.
4. The Contractor shall verify limits of disturbance and reconcile field

conditions with drawings and schedules if discrepancies exist. Contractor
shall inform the Landscape Architect of discrepancies before proceeding
with installation. Contractor shall assume full responsibility if the
Landscape Architect is not notified.
5. Reinstate all damaged or disturbed areas beyond the limit of work.
6. Any weed growth or non-organic material more than 75 mm in diameter

should be removed off to site.
7. The Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately after planting and will
continue until final written acceptance of plant material.
8. The Owner’s representative shall flag all trees to be retained and protected
and/or transplanted prior to start of construction.
9. The Contractor shall verify all tree removals and/or transplants with
Owner’s representative prior to start of construction.
10. The Contractor shall maintain positive drainage away from all building
foundations, structures, and planting beds.
11. The maximum slope within disturbed areas shall not exceed 3:1, unless
otherwise noted.
12. The Landscape Contractor shall supply all plant materials in quantities
sufficient to complete all plantings shown on the drawings.
13. All plants shall bear the same relationship to finish grade as to the
original grades before digging.
14. The Landscape Contractor shall guarantee all plant materials for one (1) year
from the date of acceptance.
Page | 17
15. All areas of the site which have been disturbed and not otherwise
developed shall be loamed with a minimum depth of 150 mm topsoil and
seeded.
16. Any and all work shall be maintained within the property lines or limit of
disturbance.
17. The Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative as each phase/site
location work is undertaken.
18. Irrigation shall be done by hand/manually using bucket and hose method.
Refer to drawings for hose tapping locations.
19. Round all tops and corner of slopes smoothly.
20. All plants specified shall be supplied with seedlings instead of full/mature
growth plants. These must be maintained according to the size and
distance specified in the Consolidated Plant List/Planting Plan.
1.4 Delivery, Handling and Storage
Written Notice of Plant Deliveries, in advance, shall be submitted when the plant
material is to be delivered and shall indicate the manner of shipment. Contractor shall
furnish an itemized list, in duplicate, of the actual quantity of plant material in each
delivery. List shall include the pertinent data as indicated. This list and the necessary
inspection certificates to accompany each plant shall be delivered to the Architect/or
Resident Engineer prior to acceptance and planting of the plant materials.
1.4.1 Packing and Transport
1.4.1.1 Plants shall be protected during delivery to prevent damage or desiccation of

leaves. Shrubs shall be protected during transport by covering exposed branches.
1.4.1.2 Material other than plants and ground cover shall be delivered to the site in the original,
unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, and trade
name or trademark. In lieu of containers, material may be furnished in bulk, and a
certificate indicating the above information shall accompany each delivery.
1.4.1.3 Pesticide material, including soil fumigants, shall be delivered to the site in the original
unopened containers. Containers that do not have a legible appropriate label will be
rejected.
1.4.2 Storage and Protection
1.4.2.1 Plants and materials not installed or used on the day of arrival at the site shall be stored
and protected as follows:
Page | 18
a. Outside storage shall be shaded and protected from the wind.

b. Bare root plants shall be heeled-in.
c. Plants, including those in containers, shall be kept in a moist condition
until planted.
d. Fertilizers shall be kept in dry storage away from contaminants.
2.1 Plant Materials
2.1.1 Plant material furnished shall be nursery grown of mature size, well-branched and
proportioned, particularly with respect to the width/height relationship, and shall have
a fibrous root system free of disease, defects or injuries and is structurally sound. Plants
may be inspected at the place of growth, but such inspection shall not preclude the right
of rejection at the site. Plants shall be of good quality, aesthetic-wise and function-
wise; as per requirement. Plants of kinds other than those named in the plant list will
not be accepted unless specifically approved in writing. Proposed substitutes in each
case must possess the same essential characteristics as the kind of plant actually
specified in regard to appearance, ultimate height, shape, habit of growth, and general
soil and other requirements. In no case shall the average value and quality of
substituted plants be less than the value and quality of plants actually specified. Plants
of greater value and quality may be accepted without additional cost to the owner. All
plant materials shall be thoroughly watered following planting. Monitor material and
ensure adequate moisture until acceptance. All plant material shall be container grown,
potted, as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.1.1 Trees shall have straight trunks, well and characteristically branched for its species.
2.1.1.2 Shrubs, vines, groundcovers shall be planted in a continuous planting bed of 600 mm
depth with approved topsoil covered with 75 mm mulch.
2.1.1.3 Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or other approved cloth. No balled plant will
be acceptable if the ball is cracked or broken or if the stem is loose in the ball, either
before or during the process of planting. If all other requirements are met, container-
grown plants may be furnished in lieu of balled and bur lapped plants.
2.1.1.4 Container-grown plants shall have been grown in pots, cans, tubs, or boxes for a
minimum of six (6) months and a maximum of two (2) years. Plants shall have
sufficient roots to hold earth intact, without being root bound, after removal from
containers.
2.1.1.5 Bare-root plants shall be dug with the root system substantially intact but with the earth
carefully removed. Roots shall be covered with a thick coating of mud by "pudding"
after the plants are dug. If all other requirements are met, balled and bur lapped plants
may be furnished in lieu of bare-root plants.
Page | 19
2.1.2 Topsoil and Plant Backfill: Shall be fertile, natural soil, typical of the locality, free from
stones and weeds and as approved by the Architect. 200 mm layer of topsoil shall be
spread over the scarified sub-grade. Compaction shall be 80% density.
2.1.3 Commercial Fertilizer and Manure: Commercial fertilizer shall be uniform in

composition, and delivered to the site in unopened original containers, each fully
labeled, conforming to the applicable laws and bearing the trade name or trademark
and warranty of the producer. Manure; supply nutrients, improve soil structure,
aeration and water holding capacity and promote microbiological activity.
2.1.4 Water: Water shall contain no elements toxic to plant life, and if not readily available
at the jobsite, shall be transported to the jobsite.
2.1.5 Open-ground Shrubs: According to species; cut back or trimmed.
2.1.6 Source Quality Control
2.1.6.1 Tests/Inspection: Plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound,
healthy, vigorous, and free from disease and insect infestations. Plants larger in size
than specified may be used, with approval, at no additional cost to the owner.
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Verification of Condition: Actual planting shall be performed during periods when
weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted
practices (i.e. local planting season). Deviation from these requirements will be
permitted only when approved in writing by the Architect.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Site Preparation, General:
1. Refer to Engineering Drawings for Grading, Drainage, for trees to be cut or

removed from site, and for site servicing.
2. Refer to Architectural Drawings for Full Site Layout.
3. Determine exact locations of all underground utilities and verify in field and
report any conflict to the Owner’s Representative prior to ground works.
4. Scrape off topsoil from undisturbed site before site grading and compacting.
Stockpile topsoil for planting use.
Page | 20
5. Apply appropriate soil conditioning material/fertilizer as needed or

recommended based on soil analysis.
6. Topsoil to be spread over prepared level subsoil base to ensure a minimum

depth of 600 mm to all shrub planted areas and 150 mm depth to grass
areas.
7. Areas defined as planting or grassed areas to be broken up to remove existing

surfacing and base course to full depth of construction, which should be
removed from the site. Base of excavations to be ripped/broken up prior to
backfilling with subsoil and topsoil, to remove any compaction and ensure
free drainage.
3.2.2 Protection of Planting Areas: Before excavations are made, precautionary measures
shall be taken to protect existing vegetation during planting operations.
3.2.3 Surface Preparation: Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be
marked on the ground and approved before excavation is made.
3.2.3.1 Excavation: Excavation shall extend to the required sub grades indicated, but in
no case less than specified. Plant pits shall be circular in outline or square if machine
dug and shall have vertical sides and flat bottoms. Minimum depths of plant pits shall
be measured from finished grade. Planting beds in which ground cover or similar
plantings are required shall be excavated to the depth shown to eliminate objectionable
weeds or grasses.
3.2.3.2 Pits: Diameter or minimum width of pits shall be at least 300 mm greater than the
diameter of the ball. Minimum depth of pits shall be 400 mm measured from finished
grade, and this depth shall be increased as necessary to accommodate the ball and a
minimum of 150 mm of compacted topsoil blend below the ball.
3.2.3.3 Excess Soil: Acceptable excess excavated topsoil shall be used to form saucers around
plants, wasted uniformly over nearby low or rough lawn areas, or disposed as approved.
Excess soils not required or not suitable for the above usage shall be disposed as
directed.
3.3 Installation
Plants shall be planted in pits and at such levels that, after settlement, plants will bear
the same relation to the finished grade of the surrounding ground as to the grade of the
ground from which plants were dug. Plants shall be set plumb in position until the soil
has been tamped solidly around the ball. Plants shall be planted in approved topsoil
blend which shall be settled by watering and tamping. To compensate for shrinkage,
the finished grade of the topsoil blend prior to watering shall be fixed at an elevation
that is 10 percent of the fill depth higher than the desired finished grade. To facilitate
Page | 21
watering, a shallow saucer approximately 75 mm deep shall be formed around each

plant by placing a ridge of topsoil blend around the edge of each filled-in pit.
3.3.1 Balled and bur lapped plants shall be placed on a minimum of 150 mm of compacted
topsoil blend that has been hand-tamped prior to placing plants. Plants shall then be
placed in the plant pit and the topsoil blend tamped to fill all voids under the base and
around the ball to a height of one-half the depth of the ball. Cloth, ropes, wires, and
other wrapping material shall be cut away from the top half of the ball, and backfilling
shall be completed. In no case shall cloth be pulled out from under the ball.
3.3.2 Containers shall be opened and the plants carefully removed so that the earth around
the roots of the plants remains unbroken. Plants shall be placed on a minimum of 150
mm of compacted topsoil blend that has been hand-tamped prior to placing plants.
Plants shall be placed in the plant pit and the topsoil blend tamped to fill all voids under
the base and around the ball to the full depth of the ball.
3.3.3 Bare-root stock shall be planted so that the roots are arranged in a natural position.
Damaged roots shall be removed with a clean cut. Cuts larger than 12.5 mm in diameter
shall be painted with tree-wound dressing. Topsoil shall be carefully worked in among
the roots. The remainder of the backfill shall be tamped and watered.
3.4 Application
3.4.1 Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs
and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots during transplanting, but must
never exceed one-half of the branching structure. With approval, pruning may be done
before the delivery of plants but not before plants have been inspected and approved.
Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs.
3.4.2 Mulching: Within two (2) days after planting, plants shall be mulched with a layer of
mulch material covering the entire saucer area around each plant to a depth of 50 mm
to 75 mm. Peat used as the mulch material shall be saturated and incorporated into the
top 50 mm of the soil.
3.4.3 Watering: During the planting period, and for two (2) weeks thereafter, plants shall be
watered by the contractor in accordance with the needs of the species, and as required
by the individual plant.
3.5 Schedule
Maintenance operations for Installed Shrubs, Installed Plants and Installed Ground
Covers shall begin immediately after planting and shall continue as required until final
acceptance. Plants shall be kept in a healthy, growing condition by necessary
maintenance. Plants shall be inspected at least once per week and needed maintenance
performed promptly.
Page | 22
Plants shall be measured by per plant and the quantity to be measured for payment shall
be the actual number of plants in placed in accordance with this Specification and
within the limits of construction as designated on the Plans or as ordered by the
Architect.
The actual number of plants planted shall be the basis for payment based on the
Contract unit bid price.
PAY ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT
807 (3) b.1 Softscape, Shrubs (Kucharitas, 150mm Ht.) ea.
807 (3) b.2 Softscape, Shrubs (Joseph's Coat, 150mm Ht.) ea.
807 (3) b.3 Softscape, Shrubs (Shell Ginger, 600mm Ht.) ea.
807 (3) b.4 Softscape, Shrubs (Ti Plant "Rubra", 1000mm Ht.) ea.
807 (3) b.5 Softscape, Shrubs (Pigeon Berry, 900mm Ht.) ea.
807 (3) b.6 Softscape, Shrubs (Chinese Croton, 900mm Ht.) ea.
807 (4) Softscape, Grass (Bermuda Grass) sq.m.
807 (7) Softscape, Garden Soil cu.m.
807 (16) a Landscape Maintenance for 12 Months l.s.
Page | 23
ITEM 1002 PLUMBING FIXTURES
1002.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including equipment and
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of plumbing fixtures
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Submit for each type of fixture specified. Include descriptions of materials,

finishes, fastenings and anchoring devices, and appurtenances.
1.2.2 Samples
Submit one of each type of accessory complete with appurtenances and finished as
specified. Approved samples may be installed in the work provided each sample labeled
for identification and location recorded.
Deliver materials to the site in unopened containers, labeled with the manufacturer's
names and brands, ready for installation. Store accessories in safe, dry locations until
needed for installation.
2.1 Materials and Finishes
This specifications covers all plumbing fixtures made from a mixture of white burning
clays and finely ground minerals, the wares are subjected to a high temperature rendering
them incapable of adsorbing liquid, when unglazed, does not have a mean value of water
absorption greater than a 5% of the dry weight making it sanitary and odorless. Coating
shall be applied on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze
giving it a permanent colored finish and retains high quality gloss resistant to acids and
alkaus making it easy to maintain.
2.2 Manufactured Units
2.2.1 Water Closets

American Standard or approved equal.
a. New Linear EL close-coupled toilet, top push, Product Code: CP-2838
Page | 24
b. New Linear flush valve toilet, Product Code CP-2238
2.2.1.1 Douche Hygienic Spray

American standard or approved equal
a. In-wall Hand Spray Kits, Product Code: BS2-002
2.2.1.2 Toilet Flush Valve

a. Lever type, Product Code: CF-9803.005
2.2.2 Urinal
a. New Washbrook Urinal, Product Code: 6502 (top inlet)
2.2.2.1 Urinal Flush Valve

a. Product Code: 9802.005
2.2.3 Lavatories
a. Ovalyn under Counter Wash Basin, Product Code: CP-0470

b. New Codie Square wall hung wash lava, Product Code: CP-1560
c. Wash Basin Concept, Product Code:CLO294F1-6DA10
2.2.3.1 Lavatory Faucet

American Standard or approved equal
a. Seva basin mono faucet, Product Code: 6506
2.2.4 Pantry Sink - Stainless steel single bowl with drainer
2.2.4.1 Pantry Faucet

a. Ceraplan Single long lever sink faucet, Product Code: CF-5637.501
2.2.5 Bath and Shower Faucet

Page | 25
a. Ceraplan In-wall Bath & Shower Faucet, Product Code: CF-1218.601
3.1 Installation
Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the
attached fixtures. Exposed screw heads shall be oval. Install fixtures at the location and
height as shown in the drawings. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable
plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted. Coordinate fixture
manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work progress. After
installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original
condition or replace with new work.
3.1.1 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mounting on concealed back-plates shall have concealed fasteners. Unless indicated or

specified otherwise, install fixtures with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined
braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shield, or other approved
fasteners as required by the construction. Install back-plates in the same manner, or
provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction.
Plumbing Fixtures shall be measured per set based on actual in-place installed as shown
on Plans and Accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
The actual number of Plumbing Fixtures installed including all accessories and ready for
service shall be the basis for payment based on the Contract unit bid price.

NO.
1002 (14) a Lavatory (Wall Hung) including faucet, P-Trap, and other set
accessories
1002 (15) a Lavatory (Undercounter) including faucet, P-Trap, and set

other accessories
1002 (15) b Lavatory (Countertop) including faucet, P-Trap, and other set
accessories
1002 (5) a Water Closet (Flush Tank) including other accessories set
Page | 26
1002 (5) b Water Closet (Flush Valve) including other accessories set
1002 (9) b Urinal including Flush Valve and other items to complete set
the work
1002 (19) Shower including other necessary accessories to set

complete the system
1002 (11) a.1 Kitchen Sink (with Left Drain) including P-trap, and other set
accessories
1002 (11) a.2 Kitchen Sink (Single Bowl) including P-trap, and other set
accessories
1001 (19) Grease Trap Cap = 7 gpm set
1002 (21) Faucet including other necessary accessories to complete each

the system
Page | 27
ITEM 1002 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
1002.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including equipment and
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all toilet
accessories as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
Submit for each type of accessories specified. Include descriptions of materials, finishes,
fastenings and anchoring devices, and appurtenances.
1.2.2 Samples
Submit one of each type of accessory complete with appurtenances and finished as
specified. Approved samples may be installed in the work provided each sample labeled
for identification and location recorded.
Deliver materials to the site in unopened containers, labeled with the manufacturer's
names and brands, ready for installation. Store accessories in safe, dry locations until
needed for installation.
2.1 Materials and Fabrication:
Fabricate accessories in accordance with commercial practice, with welds ground

smooth. Bend, flange, draw, form, and perform similar operations in a manner to ensure
no defects. Flanges of recessed accessories shall return to walls to provide a continuous,
tight-against the wall installation.
2.1.1 Corrosion-resistant steel shall conform to AISI, Type [302] [304]. The exposed
surfaces shall have a No. 4 finish, unless otherwise specified..
2.1.2 Brass shall be [cast] [forged], in accordance with ANSI A112.18.1M. Steel sheet shall
conform to ASTM A 366/A 366M and ASTM A 568/A 568M. Surface preparation and
pretreatment shall be provided as required for the subsequent finish.
Page | 28
2.1.3 Galvanized-steel sheet shall be hot-dipped, minimum spangle, conforming to ASTM A

526/A 526M, with not less than a 1.25-ounce 35 gram zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A 525. ASTM A 525M. The surface preparation for painting shall conform to
ASTM D 2092, Method A.
2.2 Finishes
Finishes on metals not specified otherwise shall be provided as follows:
Metal Finish
Corrosion-resisting steel General-purpose polished
(Stainless Steel)
Aluminum Satin Anodic, Clear
Carbon Steel Bright Chromium Plate
Copper Alloy (Brass) Bright Chromium Plate
Zinc Alloy Bright Chromium Plate
2.3 Manufactured Units
2.3.1 Toilet Paper Holder

Toilet paper holder shall be “American Standard” model CF-2786.908.
2.3.2 Liquid-Soap Dispenser

Liquid-soap dispenser shall be “American Standard” model CF-8006.
2.3.3 Robe Hook

Robe hook shall be “American Standard” model CF-2281.908.
2.3.4 Towel Holder

Towel holder shall be “American Standard” model CF-2788.908.
2.3.5 Automatic Hand Dryer

Automatic hand dryer shall be “American Standard” model CF-8005, 2200w surface
mounted automatic hand dryer with AC power of 220 V.
2.3.6 Soap Dish
2.3.6.1 Soap dish shall be “American Standard” model CF-2282.908.
2.3.6.2 Soap and Shampoo Holder shall be “American Standard” model CL9252A-6DACT
for building MJOQ and MEQ
2.3.7 Mirrors
Page | 29
Glass for mirrors is specified under Section 8800 “Glazing”. Mirror frame shall be
fabricated from not less than 25 mm by 25 mm x 2 mm thick tubular aluminum as
indicated on the drawing. Back of the mirror glass shall be protected with 25 mm thick
marine plywood and moisture-proof shock-absorbing back padding. Concealed
galvanized-steel wall hanger of the size required for the mirror size shall be provided.
Mirror shall be hung and locked in place with not less than two vandal-resistant locking
screws per mirror.
2.3.8 Shower Head

Shower head shall be “American Standard” model CF-9051.000.
2.3.9 Angle Valve Body

Angle valve shall be “American Standard” model CF-9113.005.
2.3.10 Paper Towel Dispenser
Paper towel dispenser shall be similar to “BOBRICK B-262” surface mounted cabinet
stainless steel type 304, satin finish. Door has tumbler lock and key and stainless steel
piano hinge.
2.3.11 Grab Bars
Grab bars shall be fabricated from not less than 1.2 mm thick, 32 mm outside diameter
seamless corrosion-resistant stainless steel tubing. Wall flanges shall be fabricated for
a concealed installation from 2.5 mm minimum thickness corrosion-resistant stainless
steel not less 80 mm in diameter. Flanges shall be fully welded to the grab bar. A
concealed mounting plate shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant or galvanized
steel. Secure flanges to the mounting plate with not less than four corrosion-resistant
steel vandal-resistant setscrews. Exposed surfaces shall have a finish as specified
unless the finish is indicated as non-slip. Non-slip finish shall have a peened or light
knurled finish.
3.1 Installation
Field measurements shall be taken prior to the preparation of drawings and fabrication
to ensure proper fits. Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have
the same finish as the attached fixtures. Exposed screw heads shall be oval. Install
fixtures at the location and height as shown in the drawings. Protect exposed surfaces of
accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted.
Coordinate fixture manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as the work
progresses. After installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged
work to its original condition or replace with new work.
Page | 30
3.1.1 Recessed Accessories
Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction of fasten to metal studs or framing with
sheet metal screws in metal construction.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mounting on concealed back-plates shall have concealed fasteners. Unless indicated or

specified otherwise, install fixtures with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined
braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shield, or other approved
fasteners as required by the construction. Install back-plates in the same manner, or
provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction.
Toilet and bath accessories shall be measured based on actual in-place installed as shown
The actual number of Toilet and Bath Accessories installed including all accessories and
ready for service shall be the basis for payment based on the Contract unit bid price.

NO.
1002 (20) a Facial Mirror (6mm Thk with 25mm Thk Plywood Backing sq.m.
and 25x25mm Tubular Aluminum Trim)
1002 (20) b Facial Mirror (6mm Thk with 12mm Thk Marine Plywood sq.m.
Backing w/ 25 x 50mm Wood Block Support)
1002 (38) Liquid Soap Dispenser set
1002 (39) Toilet Paper Holder set
1002 (40) Grab Bar set
1002 (41) Automatic Hand Dryer set
1002 (42) Toilet Paper Dispenser set
1002 (44) Robe Hook set
Page | 31
1002 (45) Soap Dish set
Page | 32
ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS
1003.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply and furnishing of materials, including equipment,
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of carpentry
and joinery works as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Applicable Publications
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.2.1 National Woodwork Manufacturers Association Inc. (NWMA) Industry Standard:
I.S 4-81 Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork
1.2.2 Philippine Trade Standards: (PTS)
631-02 Philippine Plywood

20 Philippine Lumber
1.3 Submittals
Submit to the Architect and Owner the following for approval.
1.3.1 Shop Drawings: Show all prefabricated millwork. Include details and erection data
associated with the work of other trades; materials and species; arrangements; profiles
of moldings; thickness; sizes of parts; construction; fastenings; and clearances.
1.3.2 Certificates of Grade: Submit certificates from the grading agency on graded but
unmarked lumber of plywood attesting that materials meet the grade requirements
specified herein.
1.3.3 Samples: Interior trim and moldings: One linear foot of each kind.
Deliver lumber, plywood, trim, and mill work to the jobsite in an undamaged condition.
Stack materials to ensure ventilation and drainage and protect against dampness before
and after delivery. Store materials under cover in a well-ventilated enclosure and
protect against extreme changes in temperature and humidity. Do not store products in
the building until wet trade materials are dry.
Page | 33
1.5 Grade and Quality Marking
1.5.1 Lumber: The trademark of a recognized association shall identify each piece or each
bundle of lumber, millwork, and trim.
1.5.2 Plywood: Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or
independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the
plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span rating, and
shall show exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with PTS 631-02.
1.6 Size and Patterns of Wood Products
Yard and board lumber sizes shall conform to PTS 20. Provide shaped lumber and
millwork in the patterns indicated and standard patterns of the association covering the
species. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes
shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the applicable standard.
1.7 Moisture Content of Wood Products
Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. The maximum moisture content of wood
products at time of delivery to the job site shall be 17 percent.
1.8 Lumber Grade and Species
1.8.1 All lumber shall be grade “Clear”.
1.8.2 Clear shall be sound lumber and free from unsound knots, shake, splits, dry-rot
or other defects impairing the strength of the piece.
2.1 Materials
Expansion Shield shall be of high quality, heavy duty, with size, group, type, class, and
style best suited for the purpose. Shield shall be accurately recessed and shall be not less
than 63 mm into concrete or masonry. Lumber products shall be “Matimco Philippine
Wallboard Corporation”.
2.1.1 Nails and Staples shall be of best quality with type and size best suited for the purpose.
Nails may be of the annular ring or the screw type, with mechanically deformed shanks.
2.1.2 Lumber for interior millwork, handrail, shelves, wardrobes, wood base, finish and trim
shall be “Tanguile”, grade clear.
Page | 34
2.1.3 Lumber for door and window jambs shall be “Yakal”, “Guijo” or other approved similar
hardwood species.
2.1.4 Plywood shall conform to PTS 631-02.
2.1.5 Cabinets, countertops and other accessories shall be constructed from 20 mm thick
melamine laminate on Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) substrate materials shall be
prime grade; leveled, and shall be treated at the mill to be free of scale, ragged edges,
deep scratches or other imperfection defects.
2.1.6 Adhesives
2.1.6.1 For Interior Millwork and Woodwork: Shall be of best quality, water and mold resistant.
2.1.7 Wood Preservative: Shall be colorless “Solignum” or approved equivalent for kiln
dried wood.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Requirements: Lumber and woodwork shall be covered and protected from the elements
until used. All lumber shall be surfaced-four side. All materials for millwork shall be
kiln-dried. Where practicable, shop assembles and finishes items of built-up millwork.
Material shall show no warp after installation. Fasten finish work with finish nails.
Provide blind nailing where practicable. Set face nails for putty stopping. All lumber
surfaces in contract with concrete and masonry shall receive one brush coat of bituminous
paint.
3.1.2 Interior Finish Carpentry
3.1.2.1 Door Frames: Set plumb and square. Provide solid blocking at no more than 400 mm
on centers for each jamb. Blocking shall be positioned to occur behind hinges and lock
strikes. Double wedge frames and fasten with finishing nails. Set nails for putty
stopping.
Carpentry and Joinery Works which include Cabinets, Countertops and Accessories shall
be measured based on actual in-place installed as shown on Plans and Accepted to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 35
The actual number of Carpentry and Joinery works which include Cabinets, Countertops
and Accessories installed including all accessories and ready for service shall be the basis
for payment based on the Contract unit bid price.

NO.
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
1003 (1) a.3a Ceiling Finish: 6mm Thk Fiber Cement Board, Wood sq.m.
Finish (Soffit of Eaves)
1003 (1) a.3b Ceiling Finish: 6mm Thk Perforated Fiber Cement Board sq.m.
(Soffit of Eaves)
1003 (1) a.3c Ceiling Finish: 6mm Thk Fiber Cement Board (Soffit of sq.m.
Eaves)
1003 (1) e1.1 Ceiling,Gypsum Board on Metal Suspension System sq.m.

;12mm Thk Ordinary Type
1003 (1) e1.2 Ceiling, Gypsum Board on Metal Suspension System sq.m.
;12mm Thk Moisture Resistant
1003 (1) e1.3 Ceiling, Gypsum Board on Metal Suspension System sq.m.
;12mm Thk Fire Rated
1003 (1) e1.4 Ceiling, Gypsum Board on Metal Suspension System ; 2- sq.m.
12mm Thk Fire Rated
1003 (1) e1.5 25mm Shadow Gap l.m.
1003 (1) e1.6 12mm Shadow Gap l.m.
1003 (1) e1.7 Cove Ceiling, using 12mm Thk Ordinary Gypsum Board, l.m.
H= 150mm x Depth= 200mm, Painted Finish
1003 (1) e1.8 Cove Ceiling, using 12mm Thk Ordinary Gypsum Board, l.m.
H= 200mm x Depth= 200mm, Painted Finish
1003 (11) Fascia Board, using 15mm Thk Fiber Cement Board, sq.m.
a.3.1 Painted Finish
Page | 36
1003 (11) Fascia Board, using 12mm Thk Fiber Cement Board, sq.m.
a.3.2 Painted Finish
1003 (1) e2 Prepainted Metal Panel, Metal Spandrel Ceiling sq.m.
1003 (1) e3 Prepainted Metal Panel, Linear Metal Ceiling sq.m.
1003 (1) e4 Laminated Wood Ceiling sq.m.
1003 (1) e5 Wall Finish: Machine Press Laminated Matte Painted sq.m.
Panel on 12mm MDF Board w/ 10mm Groove at Every
Joint.
1003 (1) e6 Wall Finish: 200mm x 3000mm WPC Fluted Wall Panel sq.m.
on 50 x 100mm Wood Joist
1003 (1) g2 PVC Ceiling with Air Vent on Metal Frame sq.m.
ON-FLOOR AND OVERHEAD CABINETS
1003 (4) a.21 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-108 (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.21 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-108 (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.22 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-113g (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.22 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-113g (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.23 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-114h (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.23 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-114h (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.24 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-115m (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.24 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-115m (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.25 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-116p (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.25 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-116p (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
Page | 37
1003 (4) a.30 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-133k (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.30 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-133k (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.32 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-135d (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.32 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-135d (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.33 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-136e (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.33 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-136e (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.34 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-137k (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.34 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-137k (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.35 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-138q (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.35 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-138q (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.36 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-203c (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.36 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-203c (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.37 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-204c (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.37 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-204c (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.39 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-211q (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.39 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-211q (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.40 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-213h (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.40 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-213h (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
Page | 38
1003 (4) a.44 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-230b (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.44 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-230b (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.45 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-231f (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.45 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-231f (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.46 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-232b (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.46 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-232b (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) a.47 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry 1-312d (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
1003 (4) b.47 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry 1-312d (Location: Bldg 1) ea.
Page | 39
1003 (4) a.54 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry/Food Preparation 1-306 ea.
(Location: Bldg 1)
1003 (4) b.54 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry/Food Preparation 1-306 ea.

(Location: Bldg 1)
(Location: Bldg 1)

(Location: Bldg 1)
(Location: Bldg 1)

(Location: Bldg 1)
1003 (4) a.57 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen & Dining 11-115 (Location: ea.
Bldg 11)
1003 (4) b.57 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen & Dining 11-115 ea.
(Location: Bldg 11)
Bldg 12)
(Location: Bldg 12)
1003 (4) a.59 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen & Dining 12.2-104 ea.
(Location: Bldg 12.2)
1003 (4) b.59 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen & Dining 12.2-104 ea.
Page | 40
1003 (4) a.62 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen 13-104 (Location: Bldg 13) ea.
1003 (4) b.62 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen 13-104 (Location: Bldg ea.
13)
1003 (4) a.63 On- Floor Cabinets @ Laundry Area (Location: Bldg 13) ea.
1003 (4) a.64 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen 14-113 (Location: Bldg 14) ea.
1003 (4) b.64 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen 14-113 (Location: Bldg ea.
14)
1003 (4) a.65 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 15) ea.
1003 (4) b.65 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 15) ea.
1003 (4) a.66 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 17A) ea.
1003 (4) b.66 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 17A) ea.
1003 (4) a.67 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 17B) ea.
1003 (4) b.67 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Bldg 17B) ea.
1003 (4) a.68 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Unit A to F, ea.
Ground Flr to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) b.68 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Unit A to F, ea.

1003 (4) a.69 On- Floor Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Unit G to K, ea.
1003 (4) b.69 Overhead Cabinets @ Kitchen (Location: Unit G to K, ea.

Bldg 39)
(Location: Bldg 39)
Page | 41
1003 (4) a.75 On- Floor Cabinets @ Pantry (Location: Bldg 39) ea.
1003 (4) b.75 Overhead Cabinets @ Pantry (Location: Bldg 39) ea.
1003 (4) c.1.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Dayroom, Length= 1.80m. ea.

(Location: Ground Floor, Bldg 1)
1003 (4) c.1.2 On-Floor Cabinets @ Dayroom 1-331a, 1-332a; Length= ea.
2.0m. (Location: Third Floor, Bldg 1)
1003 (4) c.2.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Guest Bedroom 12-103 (Location: ea.
Bldg 12)
1003 (4) c.2.2 On-Floor Cabinets @ Walk In Closet 12-205 (Location: ea.
Bldg 12)
Bldg 12)
Bldg 12)
Bldg 13.
Bldg 14)
1003 (4) c.4.2 On-Floor Cabinets @ Bedroom 1 and 2 (Location: Bldg ea.
14)
1003 (4) c.5.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Master Bedroom Walk In Closet ea.
(Location: Bldg 15)
1003 (4) c.5.2 On-Floor Cabinets @ Bedroom 1 (Location: Bldg 15) ea.
1003 (4) c.5.3 On-Floor Cabinets @ Bedroom 2 (Location: Bldg 15) ea.
1003 (4) c.6.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Walk In Closet (Location: Bldg ea.
17A)
1003 (4) c.7.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Walk In Closet (Location: Bldg ea.
17B)
Page | 42
1003 (4) c.8.1 On-Floor Cabinets @ Masters Bedroom WIC (Location: ea.
Corner Units, Ground Floor to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) c.8.2 On-Floor Cabinets @ Masters Bedroom WIC (Location: ea.
All Other Units, Ground Floor to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) c.8.3 On-Floor Cabinets @ Bedroom 1 & 2 (Location: Corner ea.
Units, Ground Floor to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) c.8.4 On-Floor Cabinets @ Bedroom 1 & 2 (Location: All Other ea.
Units, Ground Floor to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) c.11 Overhead Cabinets @ Laundry Area (Location: Bldg ea.
12.2)
1003 (4) c.12.1 Overhead Cabinets @ Laundry Area including Shelves ea.
(Location: Unit A & F, Ground Flr to Fifth Floor, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) c.12.2 Overhead Cabinets @ Laundry Area including Shelves ea.
(Location: Unit B to E & G to K, Ground Flr to Fifth Floor,
Bldg 18)
1003 (4) d.1 Shelves (Location: Toilet & Bath) ea.
1003 (4) d.2 Shelves (Location: Laundry Area, Bldg 14) ea.
1003 (4) d.3.1 Lavatory Cabinets @ T&B 1 (Location: Typical Unit 4, 5, ea.
6 & 7, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) d.3.2 Lavatory Cabinets @ T&B 1 (Location: Typical Unit 1, 2, ea.
9 & 10, Bldg 18)
1003 (4) d.3.3 Lavatory Cabinets @ T&B 1 (Location: Typical Unit 3 & ea.
8, Bldg 18)
Page | 43
ITEM 1003 LINEAR CEILING SYSTEM
1003.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including equipment,
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of linear ceiling
system as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings
Submit along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details, indicating
thickness, type, grade, class and dimensions.
1.2.2 Samples
Submit the following samples for approval:
a. Metal finishes
b. Supports
c. Fasteners
1.3 Delivery, Handling, and Storage
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Handle items
carefully and store in an enclosed area from contact with soil and weather. The
Contractor shall replace all damage items.
2.1 Ceiling Panels
The ceiling panel is 200 mm wide and 0.6 mm thick made of pre-painted plain or
perforated metal panels, which are clipped on to specific carrier profiles in simple
manner. The panels can be easily removed and replaced without special tools.
2.2 Panel Carriers
The panel carrier is 62 mm wide and 29 mm deep made of 0.6 mm thick enameled steel.
Color shall be satin black. The flanges have prongs to hold the panels.
Page | 44
2.3 Panel Clips
The panel clip is made of enameled metal, color satin black. The clips are independent
from the prong; allow variable fixing of the panels to the carriers. With this clip panels
can be fixed to an angle of 50 deviating from the normal position to the carrier (90).
2.4 Flush Join Profiles
Flush join is made of unperforated enameled steel.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Carriers: Space carriers 1500 mm on centers overhead or directly to structural supports.
Utilize expansion carriers to compensate for ceiling areas that are out of square, out of
parallel or where ceiling size doors not conform to the standard 101 mm increment.
Install carrier splices at abutting ends of carrier for rigidity, and align holes of splices
with carriers.
3.1.2 Filler Strips: Insert filler strip in carriers where required. Use strip in color as selected
where directional or aesthetic features are required.
3.1.3 Ceiling Panels: Snap ceiling panels over protruding ears of carrier. Stagger joints in
panels between adjoining carriers, using an interior splice of color similar to ceiling panel
to stiffen the joint. Where panel ends are visible install end plug or panels. At angular
walls and turn, trim panels to the correct angle and join ends along top inconspicuously
with a stock angle for rigidity.
3.2 Cleaning
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean surfaces in accordance with

recommended procedure of manufacturer. Do not use abrasive, caustic or acid cleaning
agents.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually
installed with linear ceiling inclusive of suspension system and accepted to the
Page | 45
Linear ceiling system work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete
this Item.

NO.
1003 (1) e3 Prepainted Metal Panel, Linear Metal Ceiling sq.m.
Page | 46
ITEM 1003 SPANDREL METAL CEILING PANELS
1003.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of spandrel metal
ceiling panels as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Submit along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation
details, indicating thickness, type, grade, class and dimensions.
1.2.2 Samples: Submit the following samples for approval:
a. Metal finishes
b. Supports
c. Fasteners
1.2.3 Delivery Storage and Handling: Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of
damage. Handle items carefully and store in an enclosed area from contact with soil and
weather. The Contractor shall replace all damage items.
2.1 Ceiling Panels
Spandrel metal ceiling panels shall be plain with concealed screw type ceiling panel
system similar to “DN Spanflex” with a total coated thickness of not less than 0.60 mm
(ga.24) utilizing a double baked-on epoxy primer with high grade polyester color finish.
2.2 Panel Carriers
The panel carrier shall be gauge 24 (0.6mm) thick galvanized steel.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Carriers: Space carriers 1500 mm on centers overhead or directly to structural supports.
Utilize expansion carriers to compensate for ceiling areas that are out of square, out of
parallel or where ceiling size doors not conform to the standard 101 mm increment.
Install carrier splices at abutting ends of carrier for rigidity, and align holes of splices
with carriers.
Page | 47
3.1.2 Filler Strips: Insert filler strip in carriers where required. Use strip in color as selected
where directional or aesthetic features are required.
3.1.3 Ceiling Panels: Snap ceiling panels over protruding ears of carrier. Stagger joints in
panels between adjoining carriers, using an interior splice of color similar to ceiling panel
to stiffen the joint. Where panel ends are visible install end plug or panels. At angular
walls and turn, trim panels to the correct angle and join ends along top inconspicuously
with a stock angle for rigidity.
3.2 Cleaning
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean surfaces in accordance with

recommended procedure of manufacturer. Do not use abrasive, caustic or acid cleaning
agents.
installed with spandrel metal ceiling panels inclusive of suspension system and accepted
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Spandrel metal ceiling panels work are determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities
shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
1003 (1) e2 Prepainted Metal Panel, Metal Spandrel sq.m.

Ceiling
Page | 48
ITEM 1003 TOILET PARTITIONS AND URINAL SCREENS
1003.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of toilet
partitions and urinal screens as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating elevations of partitions, full scale
sections, thickness and gauges of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, the
size and spacing of anchors, details of construction, hardware, fittings, mountings, and
other related items and installation details.
1.2.2 Samples: Submit one of each item of hardware, fittings, fastening, and each type of
panel. The panel sample shall be cross-sectioned not less than 150 mm by 150 mm in
size and shall show finish on base material and core of the panel.
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Data: Submit literature for each item of hardware, fitting, fastening and
each type of panel, complete with description of materials, finishes, and anchoring
devices, and appurtenances.
1.2.4 Colors: Submit one sample of each color of partition for verification that products match
the color indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit the manufacturer's standard
color samples for selection by the Owner and/or Architect.
Deliver materials to the site in original sealed containers or packages, bearing the
manufacturer's name, brand designation, specification number, type, style and finish as
applicable. Store and handle materials in a manner to protect them from damage.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 All toilet partition panels, plasters, door, urinal screens and urinal ledges shall be
constructed of high pressure solid compact laminate. Product shall be “Willy” toilet
partition by “G.S. Go Bros.” or approved equal. Color shall be as selected by Architect
and/or Owner.
2.1.2 Door Hardware and Fixing: All pilasters shall rest on polyamide adjustable foot and
anchored to the divisional walls by black anodized “U” channel. The pilasters shall be
Page | 49
finished with black anodized heavy duty channel at the top rail. Fixing of the pilaster to
the wall shall be done with black anodized heavy duty channel.
2.1.3 Each cubicle shall be equipped with nylon steel privacy lockset, nylon door knob, nylon
coat hook and steel hinges with polyamide cover. All the accessories shall be of heat
chemical and bacteria resistance nylon.
2.2. Finish
All edges of doors and pilasters are chamfered and finish without any metal trimming.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Installation of toilet partitions and urinal screens shall be in accordance with approved
shop drawings and manufacturer's installation and directions.
All works performed under this item shall be measured by actual number of toilet
partitions and urinal screens installed, and accepted satisfactory by the Architect.
Toilet partitions and urinal screens work are determined and provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute
full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals

NO.
1002 (43) Urinal Partition, 20mm Thk x 400mm W X 1150mm H set
1003 (23) a.22 Toilet Partitions, 15mm Thk Solid Grade HPL with l.s.
Hardware, fittings, fastening and anchoring system. (51
cubicles; Location: Building 1)
Page | 50
cubicles; Location: Building 12.2)
Page | 51
ITEM 1003 WOOD PLASTIC COMPOSITE FLUTED PANEL
1003.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of wood plastic
composite fluted panel as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data complete with description of
materials, finishes and fastening system.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating elevations of wall, full scale sections,
thickness and gauges of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, the size and
spacing of anchors, details of construction, mountings, and other related items and
installation details.
1.2.3 Samples: Sample of cross sectioned panel not less than 150 mm by 150 mm in size and
shall show finish on base material and core of the panel.
1.2.4 Colors: Submit one sample of each color of panel for verification that products match
the color indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit the manufacturer's standard
color samples for selection by the Owner and/or Architect.
Materials shall be delivered to the site in original unopened packages, bundles or

containers and with all labels intact. Panel shall be stored in fully covered, well
ventilated areas and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity.
Panel shall be maintained at an average moisture content of 6 to 9 percent. Temperature
and humidity in the storage area shall closely approximate the temperature and
humidity of the rooms in which the wall panel cladding is to be installed.
1.4 Environmental Conditions
Rooms where wood plastic composite fluted panel is to be installed shall have working
or adequate arrangements for ventilation. The temperature shall be maintained at 14 to
27 degrees C and the humidity shall be maintained as recommended by the
manufacturer starting not less than three (3) days prior to beginning the installation of
panel and continuing throughout the remainder of the contract period.
Page | 52
2.1 Wood Plastic Composite Fluted Panel (WPC)
2.1.1 Wood plastic composite fluted panel shall be 12 mm x 200 mm x 3.2 mm natural oak
wall cladding material. WPC wall cladding shall be “Big Groove by QUEENSWAY”
or approved equal.
3.1 Surface Conditions
Wall shall be plumb to a tolerance of 3 mm plus or minus in a 3 meters 10 foot radius.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Installation of wood plastic composite fluted panel shall be in accordance with approved
shop drawings and manufacturer's installation and directions.
3.3 Protection
From the time of installation until final acceptance, wall panel cladding shall be
protected from damage.
installed with wood plastic composite fluted panel and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Wood plastic composite fluted panel work is determined and provided in the Bill of
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
Page | 53
ITEM 1004 BUILDING SIGNAGE
1004.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including equipment
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of signage
systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittal
1.2.1. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings showing elevations of each type of
signs, dimensions, details, and methods of mounting or anchoring; shape and thickness
of materials, and details of construction. A schedule showing the location of each type
shall be included.
1.2.2 Samples: Submit sample which shall consist of a complete sign panel with letters.
Sample may be installed in the work, provided the sample is identified and location
approved.
1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility: All signage shall be provided by a single manufacturer.
Signage shall be of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message content shown on the
drawings, shall conform to the requirements specified, and shall be provided at the
locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as detailed and
related components for a complete installation.
1.4 Qualifications
1.4.1 Signs and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products.
1.5.1 Materials shall be wrapped for storage, delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer’s
original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
1.6 Warranty
1.6.1 Manufacturer’s standard performance guarantees or warranties for a period of one (1)
year shall be provided.
Page | 54
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Signage systems shall be fabricated from high grade stainless steel 304, satin hairline
finish. Signage systems sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.2 Framing: Shall be galvanized steel channels welded ground smooth.
2.1.3 Mounting Panels: Signage shall be mounted either on 4 mm aluminum composite

panels, plastered CHB walls, plastered reinforced concrete walls, or on stone wall
cladding as indicated on the drawings. Caps bolts with nuts for the attachment of
message panels shall be 6 mm diameter stainless steel.
3.1 Workmanship
3.1.1. Make all works well formed to shape and size shown and assemble as detailed. All
items shall be of the materials, design, shape, sizes and thickness shown or called for
on the drawings and herein specified. Methods of fabrication and assembly however,
unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be of first quality craftsmanship and at the
discretion of the contractors whose responsibility shall be to guarantee satisfactory
performance as herein specified.
3.2 Fabrication
Signage systems shall be fabricated and installed as directed by the manufacturer.
3.3 Protection
All finished works shall be protected until turnover to the Owner.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in sets for areas and accepted to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
Building signage work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.
Page | 55

NO.
1004 (3) f.1 Building Signage; with Text: using 250mm H x set
30mm D x 2mm thk Stainless Steel Matte Finish,
Font Style = Arial Bold; fastening and accessories, "
BUILDING 1" (Location: Flagpole Stand, Building 1)
SIGNAGE" (Location: Roof Deck 1 FFL @ GL 9,
Building 1)
SIGNAGE" (Location: Roof Deck 1 FFL @ GL 16,
Building 1)
BUILDING 1" (Location: Roof Deck 1 FFL @ GL 11-
14, Building 1)
Font Style = Arial Bold; fastening and accessories,
"SIGNAGE A" (Location: Roof Deck 1 FFL @ GL
11-14, Building 1)
Font Style = Arial Bold; fastening and accessories,
"SIGNAGE B" (Location: Roof Deck 1 FFL @ GL
11-14, Building 1)
PROVINCES" (Location: Second FFL @ GL 27-30,
Building 1)
Page | 56
Building 1)
Building 1)
Building 1)
1004 (3) g.1 Building Signage; with Text: using 200mm H x set
Font Style = Arial; Arrow Sign: 50mm D x 2mm thk
Stainless Steel Finish, fastening and accessories, "
MORTUARY" (Location: Building 39)
Page | 57
ITEM 1004 FINISH HARDWARE
1004.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing of materials including equipment and

performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all finish
hardware as shown on the drawings and schedule, and as specified herein.
1.2.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI/BHMA) Publications:
A156.1-81 Butts and Hinges

A156.2-83 Bored and Preassembled Locks and
Latches
A156.4-80 Door Controls - Closers
A156.6-79 Architectural Door Trim
A156.7-81 Template Hinge Dimensions
A156.13-80 Mortise Locks and Latches
A156.16-81 Auxiliary Hardware
A156.18-84 Materials and Finishes
1.2.2 Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) Publications
Keying – Procedures, System and Nomenclature (Jan. 1978). Recommended Location

for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel door and Frames (1975)
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Hardware List and Catalog Cuts
Submit for approval by the Architect a listing of each item of finish hardware and a
manufacturers’ catalog cut for each different item of hardware. Submit hardware list in
the following form:
Ref. Publication Manufacturer’s Name UL Mark (if fire) BHMA Finish

Hardware Type No. and Catalog No. Rate and Listed Designation
1.3.2 Hardware Schedule
Page | 58
Submit for approval by the Architect. Include for each item the quantity,
manufacturer’s catalog number, corresponding reference publication type number,
size, finish, and key control symbols.
1.3.3 Certified Test Reports
Indicate that each item listed under Hardware Items meets the standard listed for that
item. A copy of the listing of proposed hardware items in the current applicable BHMA
directories of certified products may be submitted in lieu of test reports.
1.3.4 Keying System
Submit for approval by the Architect a keying and master keying system. Also submit
key bitting charts to the Architect prior to completion of the contract.
1.3.5 Project Reference Samples
Upon delivery of finish hardware to the site, select and tag one item of each different
type. Identify each item by reference publication type number and manufacturer’s
catalog number. Items shall remain on file until similar items have been installed, at
which time items on file shall be installed in predetermined locations.
1.3.6 Samples
Submit actual sample of each type of hardware.
1.3.7 Certificates of Conformance
Test reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that the hardware meet the
specified requirements.
1.4 Templates
The Contractor shall furnish templates or information otherwise necessary to enable

the door and frame manufacturer to make proper provision in his work to receive the
specified hardware. Where two or more articles of hardware are to be mounted on the
same door, the Contractor shall effect proper coordination between the manufacturers
of the different articles. Templates of hinges shall conform to ANSI Standard A156.7.
1.5 Delivery and Marking
Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary

appurtenance including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual container with
manufacturer’s name and catalog number. Deliver permanent keys to the Resident
Engineer.
Page | 59
2.1 Hardware Manufactures and Modifications
Provide, as far as practicable, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock hinge, pivot, or
closer manufacturer’s make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide features
indicated or specified.
2.2 Hardware Designations
Hardware items covered by ANSI/BHMA standards are specified by BHMA

designations.
2.3 Template Hardware
Hardware to be applied to metal shall be made to template. Promptly furnish template

information or templates to door and frame manufacturers. Template hinges shall
conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7. Coordinate hardware items to prevent interference
with other hardware.
2.4 Hardware Items
Conform to the respective standards listed and to requirements specified herein.

Hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts, and closers shall bear the
manufacturer’s name or trademark where it will be visible after the item is installed.
For closers with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover. Provide
hardware items as specified below and as listed under “Hardware Schedule” indicated
on the drawings.
2.4.1 Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.1, 114 mm x 114 mm and 100 mm x 100 mm unless otherwise

specified. Construct loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors
so that pins will be non-removable when door is closed. Other anti-friction bearing
hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges. Door hinges shall be stainless
steel with a minimum thickness of 3 mm.
2.4.2 Locks and Latches
ANSI/BHMA A156.2and ANSI 156.13, Series 4000, Grade 1 and 2 as indicated on the
drawings. Provide trim of stainless steel construction and commercial plain design.
Locksets shall be lever type with threaded or concealed machine screws.
2.4.3 Lock Cylinders
Page | 60
Provide cylinders for new locks including locks provided under other sections of these
specifications. Cylinders shall have six pin tumblers and shall be products of the same
manufacturer. Provide a master keying system.
2.4.4 Keys
Furnish one file key, one duplicate key, and one working key for each key change and
for each master keying system; furnish one additional working key for each lock of
each keyed-alike group. Stamp each key with appropriate key control symbol. Do not
place room number on keys.
2.4.5 Door Closers
ANSI/BHMI A156.4, Series CO2021, and Grade 1. Provide closers complete with
brackets, arms, mounting devices, fasteners, and other features necessary for the
particular application.
2.4.6 Thresholds
In accordance with type indicated on the drawings with vinyl or silicone rubber insert
in face of stop and ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
2.4.7 Special Tools
Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required
to service and adjust hardware items.
2.4.8 Door Pulls and Push Plates
Door Pulls shall be 16 mm diameter SUS satin stainless steel 304- tube with a minimum
of 2 mm wall thickness mounted on 2 mm thick satin stainless steel plates. Push Plates
shall be satin stainless steel 304 with a minimum thickness of 2 mm.
2.4.9 Kick Plates
Kick Plates shall 2 mm thick satin stainless steel 304. Size shall be as indicated on the
drawing
2.4.10 Door Bottoms and Sound Seal: Shall be zero automatic door bottom seals as indicated
on the drawings.
2.4.11 Flush Bolts: Flush bolts shall be mounted top and bottom of inactive door leaf of
double leaf doors. Flush bolts shall be “Marco Polo” or approved equal.
Page | 61
2.4.12 Door Stops and Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011. Provide
one silencer for each hole punched in hollow metal frames.
2.4.13 Weather-strips (For Exterior Doors):
ANSI A156.22. Air leakage shall not exceed 0.50 CFM per foot of crack length
(0.000774m3/s/m).
2.4.14 Perimeter Seals
Seal material for heads, jambs, and door bottoms shall be a closed-cell, expanded
cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056, Type S, Grade SBE-42 or SCE-42.
2.4.15 Exit Devices: ANSI Standard A156.3. Exit devices shall be Grade 1; type and
function are specified in hardware sets. Provide flush with finished floor strikes for
vertical rod exit devices in interior of building. Trim shall have lever handles similar
to locksets, unless otherwise specified. Exit devices for fire doors shall comply with
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for Fire Exit Hardware. Submit proof of
compliance.
2.5 Fasteners
Furnish fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with hardware.
Fasteners exposed to weather shall be of nonferrous metal or stainless steel. Use
fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation.
2.6 Finishes
ANSI/BHMA A156.18. Hardware shall have BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel),
unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless steel in BHMA
626 finish (satin chromium plated) over brass or bronze, except surface door closers
which shall have aluminum paint finish, and except steel hinges which shall have
BHMA finish. Exposed parts of concealed closers shall be finished to match the doors.
Hardware for aluminum doors shall be finished to match the doors.
3.1 Installation of Hardware
Install hardware following manufacturers’ instructions. Except as indicated or

specified otherwise, use fasteners furnished with hardware to fasten hardware in place.
Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood screws or sheet metal
screws. Use machine screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid
concrete and masonry surfaces. Use toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow
core construction. Through bolts shall be used where indicated or specified and where
necessary for satisfactory installation.
Page | 62
3.2 Acceptance
After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and other damage
until acceptance of work. Submit notice of operation testing 10 days before schedules,
so that the testing can be witnessed. Hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and
other items shall be adjusted to operate properly. Also demonstrate that tagged keys
operate respective locks. After hardware is checked, deliver tagged keys to Resident
Engineer. Correct, repair, and finish as directed errors in cutting and fitting and damage
to adjoining work.
3.3 Location of Hardware on Hinged Doors
Locate as follows, unless indicated or specified otherwise herein:
3.3.1 Locks
Locate knobs so that center line of strike is 1.023 meters (40-5/16 inches nominal)
above bottom of door frame.
3.3.2 Hinges
Locate as follows:
Top Hinge Not over 285 mm (11-1/4 inches) from inside of

frame rabbet at head to center line of hinge
Bottom Hinge Not over 330 mm (13 inches) above bottom of door
frame to center line of hinge
Center Hinge Midway between top and bottom hinges
Intermediate Hinges Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges
3.3.3 Door Closing Devices
Shall the manufacturer installed and adjusted in strict accordance with the templates
and printed instructions.
3.3.4 Deadlocks: Mount deadlocks so that center line of cylinder and strike is 1015 mm
above bottom of door frame.
3.3.5 Fire Exit Devices: Locate so that center line of lock strike is 840 mm above bottom of
door frame.
3.4 Key Cabinet
Page | 63
Locate where directed. Key as directed by the Architect.
Finish Hardware shall be measured per set based on the Plans and accepted to the
The actual number of Finish Hardware complete with accessories installed and ready for
service shall be the basis of payment based on the Contract unit bid price.

NO.
1004 (2) a Lockset Series 3400 Function 50 (Office), Grade 1 set
1004 (2) b Lockset Series 3400 Function 53 (Entry), Grade 1 set
1004 (2) c Lockset Series 3400 Function 80 (Storeroom), Grade 1 set
1004 (2) e Lockset Series 4000, Lever Type, Function 81 (Entrance set
Lock), Grade 1
1004 (2) e.1 Lockset Series 4000, Lever Type, Function 81 (Entrance set
Lock), Grade 2
1004 (2) s.1 Lockset Series 4000, Lever Type, Grade 1, Function 92 set
(Store Lock)
1004 (2) s.2 Lockset Series 4000, Lever Type, Grade 2, Function 92 set
(Store Lock)
1004 (2) f Overhead Surface Door Closer, Grade 1 set
1004 (2) g Overhead Concealed Door Closer, Grade 1 set
1004 (2) j Metal Threshold set
1004 (2) h Panic Type Threshold set
1004 (2) k Butt Hinges 100mm x 100 x 3mm (4" x 4") set/pair
Page | 64
1004 (2) l Butt Hinges 100mm x 114 x 3mm (4" x 4 1/2") set/pair
1004 (2) n Fire Exit Rim Device (w/ Entry Trim) set
1004 (2) n.1 Fire Exit Rim Device set
1004 (2) p Flush bolt ( Top and Bottom of Inactive Leaf) set
1004 (2) u Exit Sign set
1004 (2) v Door Coordinator set
1004 (2) w Deadbolt set
1004 (2) aa Door Stopper set
1004 (2) bb Lockset Series 4000, Lever Type, Function 82, Grade 1 set
1004 (2) dd Set Cup Handle Recessed Door Lock set
Page | 65
ITEM 1005 STEEL LOUVER WINDOWS AND VENTS
1005.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of steel louver
windows and vents as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturer’s Certificates of Conformance: Louvers window, door louvers, vents

and screens.
1.2.2 Manufacturer’s Data: Louvers window, vents and screens.
1.2.3 Selection of Colors: Colors of finishes shall closely approximate colors indicated.
Where color is not indicated, submit the manufacturer’s standard colors to the Architect
and /or Owner for selection.
1.2.4 Shop Drawings: Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of
louvers and vents. Indicate materials, sizes, thickness, fastenings, and profiles.
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Louvers shall be carefully

stored off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and protection against
dampness. Louvers and vents shall be free from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new one.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet: Coating designation G90.
2.1.2 Steel Louvers and Vents: Weather resistant type, with stainless steel screens and made
to withstand a wind load of not less than 146 kgs per square meter. Wall louvers shall
meet the requirements for air performance and water penetration.
2.1.3 Formed Steel Louvers Blades: Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than gauge
18 thick or as indicated on the drawings.
Page | 66
2.1.4 Formed Steel Louvers Frames: Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than
gauge 16 thick or as indicated on the drawings. Provide where indicated. Provide
mullion covers on both faces of joints between louvers.
2.1.5 Screens: Insects Screens shall be stainless steel wire mesh. Mount screens in
removable, re-wirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.
2.1.6 Formed Steel Vents: Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 6 mm thick or
as indicated on the drawings.
2.2 Fasteners and Accessories
Provide zinc-coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide
other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.
2.3 Finishes
2.3.1 Steel Louvers and Vents shall have phosphate treated and shop primed finish.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Fixed and Demountable Wall Louvers: Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap
anchors, or jamb fasteners as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.1.2 Screens and Frames: Attach frames to louvers with stainless screws or bolts.
Steel louvers and vents shall be measured by actual in place installed with respective
design / style and type of operation per set.
The number of items per set of every steel louvers and vents installed ready for service
shall be the basis of payment based on the unit bid or contract unit price.
Page | 67
1005 (7) a.2 Louver Window, Steel (45mm Thk, Aluminum sq.m.
Airvent with Stainless Steel Insect Screen, 2
Panels, Type C= 1200mm W x 400mm H)
1005 (7) a.3 Louver Window, Steel (45mm Thk, sq.m.

Weatherproof Gable Roof Louver with Stainless
Steel Insect Screen, 3 Panels, Type G=
8300mm W x 1350mm H)
1005 (7) a.4 Louver Window, Steel (45mm Thk, sq.m.

Weatherproof Louver with Stainless Steel Insect
Screen, 1 Panel, Type A= 3950mm W x 800mm
H)
1005 (7) a.5 Louver Window, Steel (45mm Thk, with sq.m.
Stainless Steel Insect Screen, Fixed, 1 Panel,
Type M= 1600mm W x 1600mm H)
Stainless Steel Insect Screen, Fixed, 4 Equal
Panels, Type K= 5500mm W x 2100mm H)
Stainless Steel Insect Screen, Fixed, 4 Equal
Panels, Type L= 4500mm W x 2100mm H)
1005 (7) a.8 Louver Window, Steel (45mm Thk, with Stainless sq.m.
Steel Insect Screen, Demountable, 7 Equal
Panels, Type T= 7000mm W x 2800mm H)
Page | 68
ITEM 1006 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1006.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including equipment,
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all steel
doors and frames as shown on the drawings and schedule, and as specified herein.
1.2.1 American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) Publications:
A 115.1-82 Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1-3/8 Inch and 1-3/4 Inch Doors
A 115.2-80 Preparation for Bored Locks for 1-3/4 Inch and 1-3/8 Inch
Doors
A 115.4-82 Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts
A 151.1-80 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical

Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing
1.2.2 Steel Door Institute (SDI) Publications:
100-85 Recommended Specifications-Standard Steel Doors and

Frames
105-82 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
107-84 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application)
111-F Recommended Completed Opening Anchors for Standard

Steel Doors and Frames
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Catalog Data

Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for steel doors and frames. Include data and
details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction.
Page | 69
1.3.2 Shop Drawings

Submit drawings for steel doors showing types, sizes, location, elevations, construction
details, metal gauges, hardware provisions, installation details and other details of
construction.
Attest that doors, frames, and accessories meet the requirements specified herein. Include
the grade and model of each door.
1.3.4 Samples
Two samples of each color for pre-finished doors. Where colors are not indicated, submit
manufacturer's standard colors and patterns to the Architect for selection.
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories with protective wrappings or packaging. Doors
and frames shall be stored on platforms under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and
accessible locations, with 6 mm airspace between doors. Remove damp or wet
packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials
with new ones.
2.1 Standard Steel Doors
Standard steel doors shall conform to SDI 100, except as specified otherwise. Doors
shall be either hollow steel construction or composite construction, fabricated from
minimum 18 ga. steel face sheets for exterior doors and 20 ga. steel face sheets for interior
doors. Prepare doors to receive hardware specified in Section “Finish Hardware."
Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush. Doors shall be 45 mm (1-3/4") thick,
unless otherwise indicated. Exterior doors shall be provided with weather-stripping and
thresholds. Doors shall be similar to “Lec Steel” or approved equal.
2.1.1 Door Grades
2.1.1.1 Standard Duty Doors
Standard duty doors shall conform to SDI 100, Level B, Model 1 seamless of size and
design indicated. Provide where shown on drawings. SDI 100, Level B, Model 3 with
stile and rail of size and design as indicated
2.1.1.2 Heavy Duty doors
Page | 70
Heavy duty doors hall conform to SDI 100, Level A, Model 1seamless of sizes and
designs indicated. Provide where shown on drawings. SDI 100, Level A, Model 3 with
stile and rail of size and design as indicated
2.2 Standard Steel Frames
Shall conform to SDI 100, except as otherwise specified. Fabricate frames from
minimum 16 ga. commercial grade cold-rolled steel for all exterior and interior steel
doors. Form frames to sizes and shapes indicated welded corners. Provide steel frames
for steel doors, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or continuously

weld stops and rabbets. Grind weld smooth.
2.3 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors,
zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than gauge 18.
2.3.1 Wall Anchor
Provide a minimum of three anchors for each jamb. Locate anchors opposite top and
bottom hinges and midway between.
2.3.2 Masonry
Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 5 mm (3/16") diameter steel

wire, adjustable or T-shaped.
2.4 Fire Doors and Frames
2.4.1 Label: Labeled fire doors, frames, and hardware shall bear the identifying label of the
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or as an alternative in lieu of such label, the fire doors,
frames, hardware, and accessories shall bear the label of a nationally recognized testing
agency. The testing agency shall be adequately equipped and competent to perform
services equivalent to the inspection and certificate programs of the Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc., indicating that the units conform to the requirements of the
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
2.4.2 Oversized Doors: Where fire doors and frames exceed the size for which testing and
labeling service is offered, furnish certificates of inspection from the testing laboratory.
The certificate shall state that the doors, frames, and hardware to be provided are identical
in design, materials, and construction to a door that has been tested and rated.
Page | 71
2.4.3 Hinges, Exit Devices, Door Coordinators, Threshold, and Door Closers for Fire Doors:
Shall be fire rated corresponding to door rating and shall conform to UL requirements.
2.4.4 Steel Astragal on Fire Doors: Astragal on pairs of labeled fire doors shall conform
to UL requirements.
2.4 .5 Terminated Stops for Fire Doors: Do not terminate stops for labeled fire doors except as
approved by UL.
2.5 Weather-Stripping
As specified in Item "Finish Hardware".
2.6 Hardware Preparation
Reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors and
frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI 107, ANSI
A 115.1, ANSI A 115.2, and ANSI A 115.4. Drill and tap for surface applied hardware
at the project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface applied hardware into the door
at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI 100, as
applicable.
2.7 Finishes
2.7.1 Factory Primed Finish
Unless specified otherwise, phosphate treat and factory prime metal doors and frames as
specified in SDI 100.
2.7.2 Factory-Applied Enamel Finish
After factory priming, apply two coats of low-gloss enamel to exposed surfaces.
Separately bake or ovens dry each coat. Drying time and temperature requirements shall
be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Color(s) of finish
coat shall be as indicated and shall match approved color sample(s).
2.8 Fabrication and Workmanship
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from
defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members
shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in
true alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame
sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed
and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
Page | 72
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI 105. Plumb, align, and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or powder
actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI 100. After erection clean
and adjust.
3.2 Protection
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to
completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed. Wire brush
rusted frames until all rust is removed, clean thoroughly, and apply an all-over coat of
rust-inhibitive paint of the same type used for shop coat.
3.3 Cleaning
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove
mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
Steel Doors and frames, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall
be measured per based on per square meter as shown on the Drawings and accepted to
1006 (1) a.1 Hollow Steel Door (45mm Thk, including Door sq.m.
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type C= 900mm W x 2100mm
H)
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type F= 1000mm W x 2100mm
H)
Page | 73
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type H= 700mm W x 600mm
H)
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type L= 800mm W x 700mm
H)
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type G= 900mm W x 2100mm
H)
Jamb, Double Leaf ; Type H= 1800mm W x
2100mm H)
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type Q= 900mm W x 2100mm
H)
1006 (2) a.2 Hollow Steel Door (45mm Thk Flush, including sq.m.
Door Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type H= 900mm W x
2100mm H)
1006 (2) b.2 Hollow Steel Door (45mm Thk Flush, with Louver, sq.m.
including Door Jamb, Single Leaf ;Type E=
1000mm W x 2100mm H)
including Door Jamb, Single Leaf ;Type E= 700mm
W x 2100mm H)
W x 2100mm H)
W x 2100mm H)
1006 (2) a.4 Hollow Steel Door (45mm Thk Flush, with View sq.m.
Glass Vision Panel, including Door Jamb, Single
Leaf ;Type C = 900mm W x 2100mm H)
1006 (2) a.7 Hollow Steel Door (45mm Thk Flush, with 6mm thk sq.m.
Wired View Glass Vision Panel, including Door
Jamb, Single Leaf ;Type M = 1100mm W x
2100mm H)
Page | 74
1006 (4) b.2 Steel Louver Door (45mm Thk, including Door sq.m.
Jamb, Single Leaf ; Type T= 1000mm W x 2100mm
H)
Jamb, Double Leaf ; Type A= 1800mm W x
2900mm H)
Jamb, Demountable, Double Leaf ; Type B=
6800mm W x 2800mm H)
1006 (5) a.2 Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door (45mm Thk, 1 Hr. sq.m.
Fire Rating, including Door Jamb, Single Leaf;
Type D= 900mm W x 2100mm H )
Jamb, Decorative Laminated Steel door with 20
mins Fire Rating, Single Leaf ; Type B= 1000mm
W x 700mm H))
1006 (5) a.6 Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door (45mm Thk Flush, sq.m.
20 Mins. Fire Rating, including Door Jamb, Single
Leaf; Type J= 900mm W x 2100mm H )
20 Mins. Fire Rating, including Door Jamb, Single
Leaf; Type J= 600mm W x 2100mm H )
1006 (5) b.2 Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door (45mm Thk, 20 sq.m.
Mins. Fire Rating, including Door Jamb, Double
Leaf; Type D= 1800mm W x 2100mm H )
1.5 Hr. Fire Rating with 6mm Thk Wired glass
Vision Panel, including Door Jamb, Single Leaf;
Type K= 900mm W x 2100mm H )
1 Hr. Fire Rating with 6mm Thk Wired glass Vision
Panel, including Door Jamb, Single Leaf; Type B=
900mm W x 2100mm H )
Panel, including Door Jamb, Single Leaf; Type B=
1100mm W x 2100mm H )
Page | 75
Panel, including Door Jamb, Single Leaf; Type A=

900mm W x 2100mm H )
Type E= 900mm W x 2100mm H )
1006 (5) a.19 Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door (45mm Thk, 1-Hour sq.m.
Fire Rating with View Glass Vision Panel, including
Door Jamb, Single Leaf ;Type L = 900mm W x
2100mm H))
Type C= 800mm W x 2100mm H )
Type J= 900mm W x 2100mm H )
1006 (6) a Armored Door (Class III Grade 3 Armored Door, sq.m.
Type K= 1000mm W x 2100mm H)
Page | 76
ITEM 1006 STEEL LOUVER DOORS AND FRAMES
1006.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all steel
louver doors and frames as shown on the drawings and schedule, and as specified
herein.
1.2.1 American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) Publications:
A 115.1-82 Preparation for Mortise Locks for 1-3/8 Inch and 1-3/4
Inch Doors
A 115.2-80 Preparation for Bored Locks for 1-3/4 Inch and 1-3/8 Inch
Doors
A 115.4-82 Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts
A 151.1-80 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical
Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing
1.2.2 Steel Door Institute (SDI) Publications:
100-85 Recommended Specifications-Standard Steel Doors and

Frames
105-82 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
107-84 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement Application)
111-F Recommended Completed Opening Anchors for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Catalog Data
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for steel louver doors and frames. Include
data and details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door
edge construction.
1.3.2 Shop Drawings
Page | 77
Submit drawings for steel doors showing types, sizes, location, elevations, construction
details, metal gauges, hardware provisions, installation details and other details of
construction.
Attest that louver doors, frames, and accessories meet the requirements specified herein.
Include the grade and model of each door.
1.3.4 Samples
Two samples of each color for pre-finished doors. Where colors are not indicated, submit
manufacturer's standard colors and patterns to the Architect for selection.
Deliver louver doors, frames, and accessories with protective wrappings or packaging.
Doors and frames shall be stored on platforms under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and
accessible locations, with 6 mm airspace between doors. Remove damp or wet
packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials
with new ones.
2.1 Standard Steel Louver Doors
Standard steel louver door frames shall be 45 mm thick formed of zinc-coated steel
sheet not thinner than gauge 16 thick or as indicated on the drawings. Prepare doors
to receive hardware specified in Section “Finish Hardware." Exterior doors shall have
top edge closed flush. Exterior doors shall be provided with weather-stripping and
thresholds. Doors shall be similar to “Lec Steel” or approved equal.
2.2 Formed Steel Louver Blades
Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet shall be not thinner than gauge 18 thick or as
indicated on the drawings.
2.2.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or continuously

weld stops and rabbets. Grind weld smooth.
2.2.2 Screens: Insects Screens shall be stainless steel wire mesh. Mount screens in
removable, re-wirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.
Page | 78
2.3 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors,
zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than gauge 18.
2.3.1 Wall Anchor
Provide a minimum of three anchors for each jamb. Locate anchors opposite top and
bottom hinges and midway between.
2.3.2 Masonry
Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 5 mm (3/16") diameter steel

wire, adjustable or T-shaped.
2.5 Weather-Stripping
As specified in Section "Finish Hardware".
2.6 Hardware Preparation
Reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors and
frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI 107, ANSI
A 115.1, ANSI A 115.2, and ANSI A 115.4. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware
at the project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware into the door
at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI 100, as
applicable.
2.7 Finishes
2.7.1 Factory-Primed Finish
Unless specified otherwise, phosphate treat and factory prime metal doors and frames as
specified in SDI 100.
2.7.2 Factory-Applied Enamel Finish
After factory priming, apply two coats of low-gloss enamel to exposed surfaces.
Separately bake or oven dry each coat. Drying time and temperature requirements shall
be in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Color(s) of finish
coat shall be as indicated and shall match approved color sample(s).
2.8 Fabrication and Workmanship
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from
defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members
Page | 79
shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in
true alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame
sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed
and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI 105. Plumb, align, and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or
powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI 100. After erection clean
and adjust.
3.2 Protection
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to
completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed. Wire brush
rusted frames until all rust is removed, clean thoroughly, and apply an all-over coat of
rust-inhibitive paint of the same type used for shop coat.
3.3 Cleaning
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of steel louver doors and frames thoroughly.
Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
Steel louver doors and frames, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices
shall be measured per set based on actual in-place installed as shown on the Drawings
and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
The actual number of steel louver doors and frames installed and ready for use shall be
the basis of this payment based on the unit bid, Contract unit price.
This Item is included in Item 1006 under Steel Doors and Frames
Page | 80
ITEM 1007 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
1007.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishings and supply of materials including equipment,
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all aluminum
doors and frames as shown on the drawings and schedule and as specified herein.
The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publication is referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.2.1 Aluminum Association (AA) Publication:
(6th Edition) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall indicate elevations of aluminum doors and frames, full-size sections,
thickness and gages of metal, fastenings, and proposed method of anchoring frames, size
and spacing of anchors, details of construction, method of glazing, details of operating
hardware, method and materials for weather-stripping, installation details and other
related items.
1.3.2 Sample
Submit one full size corner showing construction, color and finish.
1.3.3 Door Schedule

Submit schedule with erection drawings indicating location of each window unit.
Deliver aluminum doors and frames to project site in an undamaged condition. Use care
in handling and hoisting aluminum doors and frames during transportation and at the job
site. Aluminum doors and components shall be stored out of contact with the ground,
under a weather-tight covering, so as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise damaging
the aluminum doors. Damaged doors shall be repaired to an "as new" condition as
approved. If doors cannot be repaired, a new unit shall be provided.
1.5 Protection
Page | 81
Finish surfaces shall be protected during delivery and handling using the Manufacturer's
Standard Method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall be applied to surfaces to which
caulking and glazing compounds must adhere.
2.1 Materials
Aluminum doors and frames shall be designed and constructed with swinging panels and
fixed side panels in the sizes and arrangements indicated. All door and framing sections
shall be extruded from AA-6063-T5 aluminum alloy 45mm (1 3/4") thick, to size and
shape as shown in drawing and details. Sections shall conform to details, 3 mm (1/8
inch) minimum thickness, and shall present straight, sharply defined lines, and shall be
free from defects impairing strength or durability. All fasteners shall be of aluminum,
stainless steel, cadmium plate or other corrosion resistant materials.
2.2 Fabrication
2.2.1 Construction and Design
Aluminum doors except for all glass entrance doors shall have narrow stile design unless
otherwise shown or specified. Door stiles and rails shall be securely joined and
reinforced by means of structural corner block assemblies. Welded corners without
structural corner block assembly will not be permitted. Lock and hinge stiles on all
double acting doors, and the lock stile of a pair of doors shall incorporate two woven pile
weather-strips from top to bottom. Doors shall be adjustable vertically and front to back.
Cut-out operations for hardware shall be accurately made and reinforced, as required.
Glass stops shall be the snap-on type with non-stretch vinyl beads. Screw fastened stops
will not be permitted. Push-pull bars shall have a formed, comfortable grip and concealed
mechanical fasteners. All vertical and horizontal door sections shall be installed so as to
receive infill thickness as specified in the glazing section of the specifications.
2.2.2 Finishes
All exposed surfaces shall be smooth and free of distracting scratches and blemishes.
Interior and exterior doors and frames shall be factory applied powder coating finish.
Color shall be as approved by the Architect.
2.2.3 Hardware
All doors shall have maximum security deadbolt lock for single doors and maximum
security hook bolt lock and 460 mm (18 inches) lever type flush bolts for double doors.
Operating hardware shall be offset pivots or center pivots as recommended and supplied
by door manufacturer.
2.2.4 Weather-stripping
Page | 82
All four sides of each door shall be provided with weather-stripping which shall provide
maximum protection against the elements and designed so it may easily be replaced.
Provide continuous wool pile, silicone treated or type recommended by door
manufacturer.
2.2.5 Glass and Glazing - shall be as specified under Item, "Glazing"
2.2.6 Caulking and Sealing - shall be as specified under Item, "Sealants and Caulking".
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Method of Installation
Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive doors and
transoms. Anchor frames to adjacent construction as indicated and in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.1.2 Protection
Protect doors and frames from damage. Prior to completion and acceptance of the work,
restore damaged doors and frames to original condition, or replace with new ones.
3.1.3 Cleaning
Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance
with door manufacturer's recommended procedure. Do not use abrasive caustic, or acid
cleaning agents.
Aluminum glass door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall
be measured per set based on actual in-place installed as shown on the Plans and accepted
The actual number of aluminum glass doors installed including main frame and ready for
service shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid, contract unit price.
Payment shall be made under
Page | 83

NO.
1007 (1) b.1 Swing Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass, Aluminum sq.m.
Frame Powder Coated Finish, Single Leaf, Type C=
900mm W x 2100mm H
1007 (1) b.3 Swing Type (12mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass Door sq.m.
withTransom, in Top and Bottom Aluminum Frame
Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type A= 1900mm
W x 2450mm H
1007 (1) b.4 Swing Type (12mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass Door in sq.m.
Top and Bottom Aluminum Frame Powder Coated Finish,
Single Leaf, Type B= 1000mm W x 2100mm H
1007 (1) b.13 Swing Type (12mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass Door, in sq.m.
Single Leaf, Type U= 900mm W x 2100mm H
Double Leaf, Type A= 1600mm W x 2100mm H
Single Leaf, Type B= 1000mm W x 2100mm H
1007 (1) b.22 Swing Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass Door with sq.m.
Sidelight and Transom, In Aluminum Frame Powder
Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type A= 6000mm W x
2700mm H
Side Window, In Aluminum Frame Powder Coated
Finish, Single Leaf, Type F= 2050mm W x 2400mm H
Sidelight and Transom, In Aluminum Frame Powder
Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type E= 3200mm W x
2475mm H
Sidelight and Transom, inAluminum Frame Powder
Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type D= 3200mm W x
2150mm H
6mm Thk Tempred Glass Sidelight and Transom, in
Page | 84
Aluminum Frame Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf,

Type B= 3200mm W x 2800mm H
Sidelight and Transom, in Aluminum Frame Powder
Coated Finish, Single Leaf, Type A= 2775mm W x
3000mm H
6mm Thk Tempred Glass Sidelight, in Aluminum Frame
Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type P= 7600mm
W x 2150mm H
6mm Thk Tempred Glass Sidelight, in Aluminum Frame
Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type Q= 7600mm
W x 2150mm H
6mm Thk Tempred Glass Sidelight and Transom, in
Aluminum Frame Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf,
Type S= 21245mm W x 3000mm H
6mm Thk Tempred Glass Sidelight and Spandrel
GlassTransom, in Aluminum Frame Powder Coated
Finish, 2- Double Leaf, Type R= 6200mm W x 3500mm
H
Page | 85
ITEM 1007 ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS
1007.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of aluminum sliding
glass doors as shown on the drawings and schedule and as specified herein.

1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls By Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations
c. Installation methods.
d. Operation and maintenance data.
Page | 86
1.3.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions;
elevations; components, anchorage, adjacent construction interface, recesses, materials,
and finishes, and connection requirements.
1.3.3 Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
1.3.4 Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 75
mm square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.3.5 Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.3.6 Manufacturers warranties.
1.4.1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer to have minimum five years documented

experience in the fabrication of aluminum sliding doors of the type required for this
project and be capable of providing field service representation during installation.
1.4.2 Installer Qualifications: Installer to be experienced in the work of this section that has
specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project.
1.5.1 Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners and installation templates
when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door
schedule.
1.5.2 Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.5.3 Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weather tight location.
1.6 Protection
1.6.1 Finish surfaces shall be protected during delivery and handling using the manufacturer's
standard method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall be applied to surfaces to which
caulking and glazing compounds must adhere.
2.1 Materials
Aluminum doors and frames shall be designed and constructed with sliding panels and
fixed side panels in the sizes and arrangements indicated. All door and framing sections
Page | 87
shall be extruded from AA-6063-T5 aluminum alloy 45 mm thick, to size and shape as
shown in drawing and details. Sections shall conform to details, formed from 3 mm
minimum frame wall thickness which includes door jambs, heads, and mullions; 2.5 mm
minimum frame wall thickness of door sash which includes door stiles and shall present
straight, sharply defined lines, and shall be free from defects impairing strength or
durability. All fasteners shall be of aluminum, stainless steel, cadmium plate or other
corrosion resistant materials.
2.2 Aluminum Sliding Door System
2.2.1 Sliding Aluminum Glass Doors:
a. Provide top and bottom rails and glass sizes to dimension heights and widths
with corresponding glazing as shown on construction documents.
b. Each active sliding door provided with a maximum single-point lock, with a key
cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior side.
2.2.2 Aluminum Frame and Extrusions:
a. Door panels 44 mm deep.

b. Framing materials including jambs and header shall be 114 mm deep.
2.2.3 Header: 114 mm wide by 190.5 mm high with a minimal structural section thickness of
6.3 mm, capable of supporting door panels of 100 kg single slide.
a. Header contains the door operator and door mounting components.
b. Provide header cover with a continuous self-locking hinge design and open flush
with the top of the header.
c. Roller track shall be a separate extrusion from the header and sound dampened
by separating the track from the header with an extruded rubber gasket.
2.2.4 Door Hanger Wheels: 38 mm diameter wheels with self lubricating sealed ball bearing
cores. Sliding doors stabilized on the track by 36 mm diameter anti-riser wheels.
Assembly shall allow the sliding doors to freely swing outward for emergency egress.
Door height shall have an upward or downward adjustment of plus or minus 5 mm.
2.2.5 Threshold Track
a. Track is required adjacent to the panels.
b. Provide with continuous threshold is available.
Page | 88
2.2.6 Finishes: All exposed surfaces shall have powder coated finish and shall be smooth and
free of distracting scratches and blemishes. Color shall be as approved by the Architect
and/or Owner.
2.2.7 Glass and Glazing: Shall be as specified under Item, "Glazing".
2.2.8 Caulking and Sealing: Shall be as specified under Item, "Sealants and Caulking".
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.1.2 Verify that other trades are complete with their required work before installing the
aluminum sliding door.
3.1.3 Mounting surfaces shall be plumb, straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper
dimension and material; material which door is anchored to shall be capable of supporting
the aluminum sliding door and associated loads.
3.1.4 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation
3.2.2 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 Installation
3.3.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2 Set all units plumb, level and secure.
3.3.3 Provide all fasteners required for installation of the aluminum sliding door system.
3.3.4 After repeated operation of the completed installation, inspect door operators and
controls for optimum operating condition and safety.
3.3.5 Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation.
3.3.6 Clean all metal surfaces promptly after installation.
Page | 89
3.3.7 Remove temporary protection, clean exposed surfaces.
3.4 Field Quality Control
3.4.1 Manufacturers representative to verify that installation of doors and controls are in
conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 Protection
3.5.1 Protect installed products until completion of project.
3.5.2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Aluminum sliding glass door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices
shall be measured per set based on actual in-place installed as shown on the Plans and
accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
The actual number of aluminum sliding glass doors installed including main frame and
ready for service shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid, contract unit price.
1007 (1) a.1 Sliding Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass, sq.m.
with Fixed Glass Sidelights, Aluminum Frame
Powder Coated Finish, Double Leaf, Type D=
3220mm W x 2400mm H
1007 (1) b.7 Sliding Type (10mm Thk Tempered Glass, sq.m
Aluminum Frame Powder Coated Finish, Double
Leaf, Type D=1600mm W x 2100mm H
1007 (1) b.15a Sliding Type (10mm Thk Tempered Glass, sq.m.
Aluminum Frame Powder Coated Finish, Double
Leaf, Type G=1500mm W x 2100mm H
Page | 90
ITEM 1008 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1008.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all aluminum
windows as shown on the drawings and schedule and as specified herein.
1.2.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publication:
ANSI/AAMA Aluminum prime Windows

302.9-197
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall indicate elevations of windows, full-size sections, thickness and
gages of metal, fastenings, and proposed method of anchoring, size and spacing of
anchors, details of construction, method of glazing, details of operating hardware, method
and materials for weather-stripping, installation details and other related items.
1.3.2 Sample
Submit one full size corner showing construction, color and finish.
1.3.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance
Submit certificates that identical windows have been tested and meet the requirements
specified herein for air infiltration and water penetration.
1.3.4 Window Schedule

Submit schedule with erection drawings indicating location of each window unit.
Page | 91
Deliver windows to project site in an undamaged condition. Use care in handling and
hoisting windows during transportation and at the job site. Windows and components
shall be stored at the site on edge, out of contract with the ground, under a weather tight
covering, so as to prevent bending, warping or otherwise damaging the windows.
Damaged window shall be repaired to an “as new” condition as approved. If windows
cannot be repaired, a new unit shall be provided.
1.5 Protection
Finished surfaces shall be protected during delivery and handling using the
manufacturer’s standard method, except that no coating or lacquers shall be applied to
surfaces to which caulking and glazing compounds must adhere.
2.1 Materials
Aluminum windows shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AAMA 302.9,

ANSI/AAMA A 134.1 and the specifications listed below. Provide windows of
combinations, types and sizes indicated or specified. Each window shall consist of a
unit including frame, sash, mullions, trim, and anchors, complete. All frame and sash
extruded members shall be constructed from 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with a minimum
nominal depth of 38 mm (1-1/2”) and minimum of wall thickness of 3 mm (1/8 inch) for
principal members which includes window jambs, head, sill, and horizontal and vertical
mullions; minimum of wall thickness of 2 mm for window sash frames which includes
window stiles and muntins. Window unit shall be prime windows of the types specified.
2.1.1 Fixed Windows
Type P-A2.5 of AMMA Specifications
2.1.2 Awning Windows: Provide each side hinged ventilator with one pair of non-friction-type
extension hinges, one sash operator designed to hold ventilator open firmly at any angle
up to 90° and one locking handle. Hinges shall have the strength necessary to
permanently support the glazed ventilator without twist or sag.
2.1.3 Casement Windows: Casement windows shall be by handle operated. Provide one pair
of non-friction-type hinges with strength necessary to permanently support the glazed
ventilator without twist or sag. Provide locking device operated by rods from a single
lever handle. Conceal rods where possible.
2.1.4 Sliding Windows: Sliding window sash members shall be butt type joined at corners
secured in place by means of stainless steel screws into integral screw ports. The sliding
window main frame at the junction of the seal and frame heights shall be sealed with
good grade of sealant per AMMA Specifications 803.2. Sash shall be easily removed by
Page | 92
lifting upward. Sash shall rolls on steel ball bearing nylon tire rollers, and shall interlock
in the closed position. Hardware shall be spring loaded, self locking cam type security
latch which provide reasonable security against forced entry.
2.1.4 Glass Glazing
Materials are specified under Item, “Glazing”.
2.1.5 Caulking and Sealing
Shall be specified under Item, “Sealants and Caulking”.
2.2 Fabrication
Window units shall conform to the requirements of Master Specification, Part A, and
“Architectural” of ANSI/AAMA 302.9.
2.2.1 Drips and Weep Holes
Provide as required to return water to outside.
2.2.2 Glazing Thickness
Design glazed windows and rabbets suitable for glass thickness shown on drawings.
2.2.3 Fasteners
Use flathead, cross-recessed type, exposed head screws and bolts with standard threads
on windows, trim and accessories. Screw heads shall be finishing flush with adjoining
surfaces. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable for material more than 1.5
mm (1/16 inch) in thickness.
2.2.4 Provisions for Glazing
Design sash for inside glazing and for securing glass with glazing channels and glazing
compound.
2.2.5 Mullions
Provide mullions between multiple windows units designed to withstand the wind load
requirements specified. Secure mullions to adjoining construction and window units in
such a manner as to permit expansion and contraction and to form a weather-tight joint.
Provide mullion covers on the interior and exterior to completely close exposed joints
and recesses between window units and to present a neat appearance.
2.2.6 Accessories
Page | 93
Provide windows complete with necessary hardware, fastenings, clips, fins, anchors,
glazing beads and other appurtenances necessary for complete installation and proper
operation.
2.2.7 Anchors
Build into, bolt to, or otherwise secure anchors and fastenings to the heads, jambs and
sills of openings and fasten securely to the windows or frames. Use concealed anchors
of the type recommended by the window manufacturer for the specific type of
construction. Use fasteners compatible with the fastened materials. Anchor each frame
at jambs with a minimum of three adjustable anchors. Provide perforated anchor stems
for mortar keying with anchor flanges of sufficient width to provide a sliding friction fit
inside frames. Extend perforated stems in less than 100 mm (4 inches) into masonry.
2.2.8 Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory powder coating finish. Color shall be as
approved by the Architect.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Method of Installation
Install in strict accordance with the window manufacturer’s printed instructions and
details, except as specified otherwise herein. Build in windows as the work progresses
or install without forcing into prepared window openings. Set windows at proper
elevation, location and reveal; plumb, square level and in alignment; and brace, strut and
stay properly to prevent distortion and misalignment. Bed screws or bolts in sill
members, joint at mullions, contacts of windows with sill and built-in fins, in mastic
sealant of a type recommended by the window manufacturer. Install windows in a
manner that will prevent entrance of water.
3.1.2 Anchors and Fastenings
Make ample provisions for securing units to each other, to masonry, and to other
adjoining construction. Windows installed in direct contact with masonry wall shall have
head and jamb members designed to recess into masonry wall not less than 11 mm (7/16
inch).
3.1.3 Protection
Page | 94
Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with, or fastened to masonry, wood or dissimilar
metals, except stainless steel or zinc, the aluminum surface shall be protected from
dissimilar materials as recommended in the Appendix to ANSI/AAMA 302.9.
3.2 Cleaning
Clean interior and exterior surfaces of window units of mortar, plaster, paint, spattering
spots and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance and to prevent fouling of
weathering surfaces and weather-tripping, and to prevent interference with the operation
of hardware. Replace with new windows all stained, discolored or abraded windows that
cannot be restored to their original condition.
Aluminum windows shall be measured by actual in place installed with respective design
/ style and type of operation in square meters.
The number of items of aluminum windows, inclusive of glazing and accessories,

satisfactorily installed and ready for service shall be the basis for payment based on the
unit bid or contract unit price.

NO.
1008 (1) a.3 Sliding Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, 2 Equal sq.m.
Panels; Type D= 1400mm W x 1150mm H )
1008 (1) a.4 Sliding Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, 2 Equal sq.m.
Panels; Type E= 1800mm W x 1150mm H )
1008 (1) a.5 Sliding Type (6m thk Clear Float Glass, Combination of sq.m.
Sliding and Fixed Window; 2 Equal Panels; Type A=
1300mmW x 1650mmH)
Sliding and Fixed Window; 2 Equal Panels; Type B=
1250mmW x 1600mmH)
Sliding and Fixed Window; 2 Equal Panels; Type H=
1300mmW x 1500mmH)
Page | 95
Sliding and Fixed Window; 3 Equal Panels; Type C=
2500mmW x 1500mmH)
Sliding and Fixed Window; 3 Equal Panels; Type C=
2800mmW x 1500mmH)
Sliding and Fixed Window; 4 Equal Panels; Type F=
2500mmW x 1200mmH)
Sliding and Fixed Window; 5 Panels; Type G=
4000mmW x 1500mmH)
1008 (1) b.1.1 Casement Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, sq.m.
Combination of Casement with Awning Window, 4 Equal
Panels, Type D= 2800mm W x 1500mm H)
Panels, Type E= 2100mm W x 1500mm H)
Panels, Type B= 2700mm W x 1700mm H)
Panels, Type G= 2575mm W x 2000mm H)
Panels, Type F= 1400mm W x 1500mm H)
Combination of Casement with Awning Window, 1 Panel,
Type D= 800mm W x 1700mm H)
Page | 96
Combination of Casement with Fixed Window, 2 Equal
Panels, Type A= 1400mm W x 1475mm H)
Panels, Type B= 3200mm W x 1475mm H)
Combination of Casement with Fixed Window, 1 Panel,
Type D= 950mm W x 1475mm H)
1008 (1) b.2.6 Casement Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass, sq.m.
1008 (1) b.2.7 Casement Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass, sq.m.
1008 (1) Casement Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass, sq.m.
b.2.10 Combination of Casement with Fixed Window, 2 Panel,
Type A = 600mm W x 1500mm H)
1008 (1) Casement Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass, sq.m.

b.2.14 Combination of Casement with Fixed Window, 3 Panels,
Type B= 1650mm W x 1500mm H)

Type A= 4275mm W x 2350mm H)

Type B= 2-900mm W x 1500mm H)

Type C= 1400mm W x 1500mm H)

Type E= 1800mm W x 1400mm H)
1008 (1) Casement Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass and sq.m.
b.2.19 Spandrel Glass, Combination of Casement with Fixed
Window, 1 Panel, Type B= 600mm W x 3500mm H)
Page | 97
Window, 3 Equal Panels, Type D= 3000mm W x
3500mm H)
Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type E= 5000mm W x
3500mm H)
Window, 1 Panel, Type M= 600mm W x 2800mm H)
Window, 1 Panel, Type N= 600mm W x 4000mm H)
1008 (1) Casement Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass, sq.m.
b.2.24 Combination of Casement with Fixed Window, 1 Panel,
Type G= 600mm W x 2700mm H)
1008 (1) b.3.4 Casement Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass, 2-Equal sq.m.
Panel, Type A= 1200mm W x 1500mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.1 Awning Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, 1 Panel, Type sq.m.
D= 600mm W x 600mm H)
E= 600mm W x 600mm H)
K= 600mm W x 600mm H)
K= 600mm W x 800mm H)
E= 600mm W x 500mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.10 Awning Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, 1 Panel, sq.m.
Type F= 900mm W x 500mm H)
Page | 98
1008 (1) c.1.14 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 1 Panel, Type D= sq.m.
1000mm W x 600mm H)
700mm W x 600mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.16 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 1 Panel, Type E= sq.m.
800mm W x 600mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.17 Awning Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, 2 Equal sq.m.
Panels; Type J= 800mm W x 1600mm H)
Panels; Type G= 1450mm W x 700mm H)
Panels; Type F= 1700mm W x 600mm H)
Panels; Type T= 2700mm W x 600mm H)
Panels; Type H= 2100mm W x 600mm H)
Page | 99
1008 (1) c.1.43 Awning Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass, 1 Panel, Type sq.m.
B= 600mm W x 600mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.44 Awning Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass, 1 Panel, Type sq.m.
D= 800mm W x 600mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.60 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 2 Panel, Type A= sq.m.
1600mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.61 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 2 Panel, Type A= sq.m.
1200mm W x 1000mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.62 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 4 Panel, Type B= sq.m.
3000mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) c.1.63 Awning Type (6mm Thk Float Glass, 3 Panel, Type C= sq.m.
2250mm W x 1200mm H)
600mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) d.1 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass, with sq.m.
Transom; 4 Equal Panels,Type A=2100mm W x 3500mm
H)
Transom; 9 Equal Panels,Type R=12680mm W x
2700mm H)
Transom; 7 Equal Panels,Type S=6850mm W x 2700mm
H)
Transom; 23 Equal Panels,Type U=23000mm W x
3000mm H)
Transom; 8 Equal Panels,Type V=7600mm W x 2700mm
H)
1008 (1) d.6 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass with sq.m.
Spandrel Glass , with Transom; 2 Equal Panels,Type L=
2100mm W x 3500mm H)
Page | 100
1008 (1) d.12 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass, with Transom; 4 sq.m.
Equal Panels,Type A= 3400mm W x 2500mm H)
1008 (1) d.14 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass; 4 Equal sq.m.
Panels,Type E= 6600mm W x 2250mm H)
1008 (1) d.15 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass with Transom; 4 sq.m.
Equal Panels,Type F= 6600mm W x 2650mm H)
1008 (1) d.16 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, with Transom; 1 sq.m.
Panel,Type C= 950mm W x 1475mm H)
1008 (1) d.17 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Clear Float Glass, with Transom; 3 sq.m.
Panels,Type H= 2575mm W x 2000mm H)
1008 (1) d.20 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass; 2 Equal Panels, sq.m.
1008 (1) d.21 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass; 3 Equal Panels, sq.m.
Type G= 2200mm W x 1150mm H)
1008 (1) d.22 Fixed Type (10mm Thk Tempered Glass; 6 Panels, Type sq.m.
J= 7550mm W x 2000mm H)
1008 (1) d.25 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Float Glass; 2 Panel, Type E= sq.m.
1600mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) d.26 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Float Glass; 6 Equal Panels, Type sq.m.
Q= 4800mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) d.27 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Float Glass; 4 Equal Panels, Type sq.m.
R= 3000mm W x 1200mm H)
1008 (1) d.28 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Clear Tempered Glass; Combined sq.m.
Fixed and Awning Window, 1 Panel, Type A= 825mm W
x 2150mm H)
1008 (1) d.29 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Clear Tinted Tempered Glass; sq.m.
Combined Fixed and Awning Window, 2 Panel, Type F=
1500mm W x 2700mm H)
1008 (1) d.30 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Clear Tinted Tempered Glass; sq.m.
Combined Fixed and Awning Window, 3 Panel, Type K=
3000mm W x 2700mm H)
1008 (1) d.31 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Float Glass; Combined Fixed and sq.m.
Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type A= 5500mm W x
2000mm H)
Page | 101
2000mm H)
1700mm H)
1700mm H)
1008 (1) d.35 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass; Combined Fixed sq.m.
and Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type K= 4400mm
W x 2400mm H)
and Awning Window, 3 Equal Panels, Type L= 3300mm
W x 2400mm H)
and Awning Window, 3 Equal Panels, Type D= 2800mm
W x 1500mm H)
and Awning Window, 3 Panels, Type E= 1800mm W x
1500mm H)
1008 (1) d.39 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass and sq.m.
Spandrel Glass; Combined Fixed and Awning Window, 2
Panels, Type H= 1500mm W x 3350mm H)
Spandrel Glass; Combined Fixed and Awning Window, 2
Panels, Type Q= 1500mm W x 7200mm H)
and Casement Window, 2 Panels, Type F= 1955mm W x
1325mm H)
and Casement Window, 2 Panels, Type F= 825mm W x
1325mm H)
and Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type B= 3225mm
W x 2150mm H)
Page | 102
and Awning Window, 5 Equal Panels, Type A= 4000mm
W x 2150mm H)
and Awning Window, 2 Equal Panels, Type M= 1800mm
W x 2400mm H)
and Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type C= 3600mm
W x 2500mm H)
W x 2500mm H
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type D= 1900mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 5 Equal Panels, Type E= 5300mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 6 Equal Panels, Type F= 5300mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 6 Equal Panels, Type F= 6000mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 6 Equal Panels, Type G= 4600mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window, 4 Equal Panels, Type H= 3200mm
W x 2500mm H)
and Awning Window,Type M= 10025mm W x 1200mm
H)
Page | 103
and Awning Window,Type N= 5700mm W x 1200mm H)
and Awning Window,Type P= 4450mm W x 1200mm H)
and Awning Window,Type S= 900mm W x 2700mm H)
Spandrel Glass; Combined Fixed and Sliding Window, 2
Equal Panels, Type C= 1500mm W x 2600mm H)
1008 (1) d.62 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tinted Tempered Glass; sq.m.
Combined Fixed and Sliding Window, 2 Equal Panels,
Type P= 1000mm W x 1250mm H)
1008 (1) d.63 Fixed Type (10mm Thk Reflective Tempered Glass; Type sq.m.
A= 3875mm W x 8525mm H)
1008 (1) d.64 Fixed Type (10mm Thk Reflective Tempered Glass; Type sq.m.
B= 3875mm W x 8525mm H)
1008 (1) d.65 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass; Type C= sq.m.
5950mm W x 12500mm H)
1008 (1) d.66 Fixed Type (6mm Thk Tempered Glass Skylight; Type sq.m.
N= 5100mm W x 2250mm H)
Page | 104
ITEM 1010 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1010.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary to complete the installation of flush wood doors as shown in
drawings and schedule and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals:
1.2.1 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall indicate the
location of each door, elevation of each type of door, details of construction, marks to
be used to identify the doors, and location and extent of hardware blocking.
1.2.2 Samples
Prior to the delivery of flush wood doors, a sample section of each type of door which
shows the stile, rail, veneer and core construction shall be submitted.
Doors shall be delivered to the site in an undamaged condition and shall be protected
against damage and dampness. They shall be stored under cover in a well-ventilated
building and shall not be exposed to extreme changes of temperature and humidity. They
shall not be stored in a building under construction until concrete and masonry works are
dry. Defective or damaged doors shall be replaced.
1.4 Factory Sealing
Before shipment, the top and bottom edges of doors shall be sealed with approved
manufacturer’s standard water resistant sealer.
1.5 Sizes and Designs
Doors shall be of the type, size, and design indicated on the drawings.
2.1 Plywood
Local plywood used for fabrication of wood doors shall conform to PTS 631-02, class 1,
preservative treated, and the adhesive used for plywood manufacture shall be water-
Page | 105
proofing grade. The Contractor shall submit compliance certificates for plywood and
adhesive for approval prior to fabrication of doors.
2.2 Lumber
Local lumber used for fabrication of wood doors shall conform to PTS 20 and as specified
under Item, “Finish Carpentry”. Lumber used shall be of premium select grade and in
no case contain any defects or damage. Lumber shall be Tanguile or higher class
hardwood specie. Wood blocking for specified hardware shall be provided in all hollow
core and mineral core doors.
2.3 Adhesive and Bonds
Adhesive and bonds shall be in accordance with NWMA Standard I.S.I. using
requirements for interior doors. Adhesives shall be waterproof type.
2.4 Glazing
Shall conform to Item, “Glazing”
3.1 Pre-fitting and Factory-Priming or Factory-Finishing:
Doors shall be furnished pre-fit, in accordance with the standard under which they are
produced. Doors with surfaces to receive paint finish shall be furnished with these
surfaces factory primed.
3.2 Interior Flush Doors:
Interior flush doors shall be hollow core flush doors conforming to NWMA I.S.I. Doors
shall have waterproof plywood veneered faces. Waterproof plywood veneered doors
shall have premium grade 6 mm. minimum face veneers. Finger jointed edge bands will
not be permitted.
3.2.1 Glazing
Where shown, doors shall be prepared for the reception of glass. Glass requirements are
specified in Item, “Glazing”.
3.2.2 Insert Louvers
Where indicated, doors shall be provided with sight-proof insert louvers. Louvers shall
be stationary. Blades shall be tenoned to the frame and the entire assembly fastened to
the door with metal mounding on both sides. The frame shall be on-removable from the
outside of the door.
Page | 106
3.3 Door Frames
Door frames shall be of the sizes and profile shown. Doorstops shall be provided. Frames
and trims shall be constructed of the species of hardwood specified in Item, Finish
Carpentry. Frames shall be set plumb and square, double-wedged, and secured with
proper size finishing nails. Solid blocking shall be provided back of jambs at butts and
lock strikes. Blocking shall be placed at a maximum of 400 mm. on centers.
3.4 Installation
Doors shall be fit, hung and trimmed as required. The lock edge of doors shall be
beveled at the rate of 3 mm in 50 mm. Cuts made on the door shall be sealed
immediately after cutting, using a clear varnish or sealer.
3.5 Hardware
Specified in Item, “Finish Hardware”, shall be carefully fitted, securely attached, and
demonstrated to work freely. Care shall be exercised not to mar or injure the work.
3.6 Priming
Doors and door frames shall be primed as specified in Item, “Painting of Buildings (Field
Painting)”. In addition, before installation, all side and edges of door frames that will be
in contract with concrete, masonry or mortar shall be given a prime coat.
Doors (inclusive of door frames) shall be measured and paid for on the basis of number
of sets completely installed and accepted by the Architect.
Payment per set shall include cost of required hardware and all incidental expenses, but
exclusive of locks for doors. Locks shall be paid for per set completely installed and
shall be under Item, “Finish Hardware”.
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1010 SOLID WOOD PANEL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Page | 107
ITEM 1010 SOLID WOOD PANEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1010.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of solid wood
panel doors and frames as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall
indicate the location of each door, elevation of each type of door, details of
construction, marks to be used to identify the doors, and location and extent of
hardware blocking.
1.2.2 Samples: Prior to the delivery of wood framed glass doors, a sample section of each
type of door which shows the stile, rail frame construction shall be submitted.
Doors shall be delivered to the site in an undamaged condition and shall be protected
against damage and dampness. They shall be stored under cover in a well ventilated
area and shall not be exposed to extreme changes of temperature and humidity. They
shall not be stored in a building under construction until concrete and masonry works
are dry. Defective or damaged doors shall be replaced.
1.4 Factory Sealing
Before shipment, the top and bottom edges of doors shall be sealed with approved
manufacturer’s standard water resistant sealer.
1.5 Sizes and Designs
Doors shall be of the type, size, and design indicated on the drawings.
2.1 Door
Wood used for fabrication of wood panel doors and frames shall conform to PTS 20
and must meet the testing requirement from various sources, preservative treated, and
the adhesive used for door and shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
Lumber used for door frames shall be of premium select grade and in no case contain
any defects or damage. Lumber shall be “Tanguile” or higher class hardwood specie.
Page | 108
All wood panel door components shall be a product of “Matimco”, Philippine

Wallboard Corporation. Panel door design shall be as selected and approved by the
Architect.
2.2 Door Jambs
Local lumber used for fabrication of wood door jambs shall conform to PTS 20 and as
specified under Item, “Finish Carpentry”.
2.3 Adhesive and Bonds
Adhesive and bonds shall be in accordance with NWMA Standard I.S.I., using
requirements for interior doors. Adhesives shall be waterproofed type and must contain
no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
3.1 Pre-fitting and Factory Priming or Factory Finishing
Doors shall be furnished pre-fit, in accordance with the standard under which they are
produced.
3.3 Door Jambs
Door jambs shall be of the sizes and profile shown. Doorstops shall be provided.
Frames and trims shall be constructed of the species of hardwood specified in Item,
“Carpentry and Joinery”. Frames shall be set plumb and square, double-wedged, and
secured with proper size finishing nails. Solid blocking shall be provided back of jambs
at butts and lock strikes. Blocking shall be placed at a maximum of 400 mm. on centers.
3.4 Installation
Doors shall be fit, hung and trimmed as required. The lock edge of doors shall be
beveled at the rate of 3 mm in 50 mm. Cuts made on the door shall be sealed
immediately after cutting, using a clear varnish or sealer.
3.5 Hardware
Finish Hardware shall be carefully fitted, securely attached, and demonstrated to work
freely. Care shall be exercised not to mar or injure the work.
3.6 Priming
Doors and door jambs shall be primed as specified in Item, “Painting and Repainting
of Buildings (Field Painting).” In addition, before installation, all side and edges of
door frames that will be in contract with concrete, masonry or mortar shall be given a
prime coat.
Page | 109
Solid wood panel door, fully equipped with fixing accessories and locking devices shall
be measured per set based on actual in-place installed as shown on the Plans and accepted
The actual number of solid wood panel doors and frames installed including main
frame and ready for service shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid,
contract unit price.

NO.
1010 (1) a Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 700mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (1) b Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 800mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (1) c Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 900mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (1) d Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 1000mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (1) e Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 1100mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (1) f Wooden Door Jamb (45mm x 1900mm W x 2150mm H) set
1010 (2) a.8 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Flush Hollow sq.m.
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type C= 700mm W x
2100mm H)
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type D= 700mm W x
2100mm H)
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type J=1000mm W x
2100mm H)
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type G=800mm W x
2100mm H)
Page | 110
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type J=700mm W x
2100mm H)
Core with Louver, Single Leaf Type D=1000mm W x
2100mm H)
2100mm H)
2100mm H)
2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type H= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type E= 600mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type E= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type D= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type C= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Single Leaf Type C= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
Core, Bi-fold Single Leaf Type D= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) a.34 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Flush Solid Core, sq.m.
Single Leaf Type B= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
Single Leaf Type F= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
Page | 111
Double Leaf Type N= 1600mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) b.2.1 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Wood sq.m.
Panel with Full Glass, Single Leaf Type M= 1600mm W x
2100mm H)
1010 (2) Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Wood sq.m.
b.2.1a Panel with Full Glass, Single Leaf Type J= 900mm W x
2100mm H)
Panel with Side Glass, Single Leaf Type A= 900mm W x
2100mm H)
b.2.2a Panel with Side Glass, Single Leaf Type A= 1450mm W x
2150mm H)
Panel with 6mmthk Tempered Full Glass in Frosted Decal,
Single Leaf Type N= 660mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) b.2.4 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Core with sq.m.
6mm Thk Clear Glass Vison Panel, Single Leaf Type F =
900mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Core with sq.m.
b.2.4a 6mm Thk Clear Glass Vison Panel, Single Leaf Type B =
900mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.4b 6mm Thk Clear Glass Vison Panel, Double Leaf Type A=
1800mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.4c 6mm Thk Clear Glass Vison Panel, Double Leaf Type A=
1800mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.4d 6mm Thk Clear Float View Glass, Singe Leaf Type E=
900mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) b.2.6 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Core, sq.m.
Single Leaf, Type B= 1000mm W x 2100mm H)
Page | 112
1010 (2) b.2.7 Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Core, sq.m.
Single Leaf, Type B= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
1010 (2) Wooden Doors, Wood Panel (45mm Thk Solid Core, sq.m.
b.2.9a Single Leaf, Type P= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.10 Single Leaf, Type B= 800mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.11 Bottom Louver, Single Leaf, Type C= 900mm W x 2100mm
H)
b.2.12 Bottom Louver, Single Leaf, Type C= 600mm W x 2100mm
H)
b.2.13 Bottom Louver, Single Leaf, Type D= 800mm W x 2100mm
H)
b.2.14 Bottom Louver, Single Leaf, Type D= 700mm W x 2100mm
H)
b.2.15 Single Leaf, Type E= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.16 Glass Panels, Double Leaf Type A= 1800mm W x 2100mm
H)
b.2.18 View Glass Panels, Double Leaf Type B= 1800mm W x
2100mm H)
b.2.19 Full Glass Panel, Single Leaf Type C= 900mm W x
2100mm H)
b.2.20 Single Leaf, Type G= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.21 Single Leaf, Type A,D= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
b.2.22 Panel, Single Leaf, Type A= 900mm W x 2100mm H)
Page | 113
ITEM 1007 FRAMELESS GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1007.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all frameless
glass entrances and storefronts as shown on the drawings and schedule and as specified
herein.
The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publication is referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall indicate elevations of doors, full-size sections, thickness and gauges
of metal, fastenings, and proposed method of anchoring frames, size and spacing of
anchors, details of construction, method of glazing, details of operating hardware, method
and materials for installation details and other related items.
1.3.2 Samples
Submit for each type of exposed finish required:
1.3.2.1 Metal Finishes 150 mm long section of each patch fittings, rails, and other items including
deadlock and door pulls.
1.3.2.2 Glass 150 mm square showing exposed-edge finish.
Deliver doors and fittings to project site in an undamaged condition. Use care in
handling and hoisting doors during transportation and at the job site. Doors and
components shall be stored out of contact with the ground, under a weather-tight
covering, so as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise damaging the doors.
Damaged doors shall be repaired to an "as new" condition as approved by the
Architect. If doors cannot be repaired, a new unit shall be provided.
Page | 114
1.5.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide entrances produced by a single manufacturer

with not less than five (5) years of successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies
of the type and quality required.
1.5.2 Installer’s Qualifications
All frameless glass entrances and storefronts shall be installed by a firm that has not less
than five (5) years successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those
required.
1.6 Warranty
1.6.1 Special Warranty
Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of all glass systems that fails in material or workmanship within specified
warranty period which shall be ten (10) years from the date of substantial completion.
Failures include, but not limited to the following:
1.6.1.1 Structural failures
1.6.1.2 Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other material beyond normal weathering.
1.6.1.3 Failure of operating components to function normally.
1.1 Materials
1.1.1 Glass: ASTM C 1048, kind FT (fully tempered) uncoated surfaces. Type 1 (transparent),
tested for surface compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR
1201 for Category 1 materials. Glass thickness shall be 12 mm.
1.2 Components
1.2.1 Accessory Fittings: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessory fittings required to

install frameless glass doors in the location indicated on the drawings.
2.2.1.1 Top and Bottom rails shall be aluminum.
2.2.1.2 Anchors and Fastening shall be concealed.
2.2.1.3 Weather-stripping shall be sweep type.
Page | 115
1.3 Hardware
2.3.1 General: Shall be heavy duty hardware units in sizes quantities and types recommended
by manufacturer for frameless glass entrances indicated.
2.3.2 Concealed Floor Closer: Shall be center hung BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases,
bottom arms, top walking beam pivots, plates and accessories required for complete
installation.
2.3.2.1 Swing: Double acting.
2.3.2.2 Delayed-Action Closing
2.3.2.3 Maximum Operating Force shall be 5lbf (22.2N) for interior doors and 15lbf (67N) for
exterior doors
2.3.3 Patch Fittings and Lock: US32D Finish.
2.3.3 Push-Pull Set: Custom satin stainless steel door pull 20 mm diameter.
2.3.4 Threshold: Provide unless otherwise indicated to be without.
1.4 Fabrication
2.4.1 Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and accessories
before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill or make other alteration to glass after tempering.
2.4.1.1 Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process and fabricate so, when
installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
2.4.1.2 Factory assembles components and factory installed hardware to greatest extent as
possible.
1.5 Aluminum Finishes
2.5.1 Powder Coat Finish: Polyester type, applicable for exterior installation, consisting of
primer and topcoat according to coating manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning,
pretreatment, application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. Color and
gloss shall be as selected by the Architect.
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
Page | 116
3.1.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.2.2 Set units level and plumb.
3.2.3 Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
3.2.4 Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.2.5 Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.
3.3 Adjusting and Cleaning
3.3.1 Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points
and weather stripping.
3.3.2 Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.
Frameless glass entrances and storefronts shall be measured by actual in place installed
with respective design / style and type of operation.
The number of items per set of frameless glass entrances and storefronts satisfactorily
installed and ready for use shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid or contract
unit price.
Page | 117

NO.
1012 (3) b.3 Tempered Glass Doors (12mm thk Frameless Glass Doors with sq.m.
Top and Bottom Patch Fittings, Single Leaf, Type G= 800mm W x
2100mm H)
1012 (3) b.4 Tempered Glass Doors (12mm thk Frameless Glass Doors with sq.m.
Top and Bottom Patch Fittings, Double Leaf, Type H= 1600mm W
x 2100mm H)
Page | 118
ITEM 1012 GLAZING
1012.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of glazing works
as shown on the drawings and schedule and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Samples
Submit duplicate 250 mm square glass samples, factory labeled, of each type of glass
specified herein.
1.2.2 Manufacturer’s Data
Include glass manufacturer’s recommendations for setting and sealing materials and for
installation of the type of glazing material specified.
1.2.3 Certificates of Compliance
Submit certificates or provide labels or marking affixed to materials, attesting that

identical materials have been successfully tested and meet specified requirements.
1.2.4 Shop Drawings
Show complete details of setting methods and materials for the type of glazing material
specified.
Deliver products to the project site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with
manufacturer’s names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in safe, dry location
and do not unpack until needed for installation. Handle and install materials in a manner
that will protect them from damage.
Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation of moisture on glazing work

during installation. Do not perform glazing work during damp or rainy weather.
Page | 119
2.1 Glass
Conforming to Fed. Specs. DD-G-451d and DD-G-1403B, unless specified otherwise. In

certain glazed panels, provide safety glazing material conforming to Consumer Product
Safety Commission 16 CFR Part 1201.
2.1.1 Float Glass
Float glass shall be flat glass that meets the requirements and tolerances of Fed. Specs.
DD-G-451d. Glass shall be 6 mm thick clear glass unless otherwise specified.
2.1.2 Tempered Glass: Tempered glass shall be 6 mm or 12 mm thick clear or tinted glass
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.1.3 Wired Glass: Wired glass shall meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories as
a fire retardant material. Wire glass shall also conform to the requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 257 “Standard for Fire Test of Window
Assemblies”. Wire glass shall be clear, polished, diamond mesh and a minimum of 6
mm thick. Provide wire glass to glass areas wherever safety requirements from fire are
necessary
2.1.4 Mirror Glass
Mirror glass shall be 6 mm thick of high quality float glass free from imperfections and
impurities. Silvering shall be performed by modern continuous operation under
controlled conditions. The coating shall be of pure silver and of adequate thickness to
provide reflectivity of 83% or more of incident light, and shall be without pinholes or
other defects visible to the naked eye.
2.2 Setting Materials
Provide setting materials of the types required for the applicable setting method, unless
specified otherwise herein. Do not use metal sash putty, non-skinning compound, non-
resident preformed sealers, or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials exposed to
view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.
2.2.1 Elastomeric Sealant
Use for channel or stop glazing metal sash. Sealant shall be chemically compatible
with setting blocks, edge blocks, and sealing tapes. Color of sealant shall be as selected.
2.2.2 Preformed Channels
Preformed channels shall be neoprene, vinyl or rubber, NAAMM SG-1, as

recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular condition.
Page | 120
2.2.3 Sealing Tapes
Preformed, semisolid, polymeric based material of proper size and compressibility for
the particular condition. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape
recommended by the glass or sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with
compressible tapes.
2.2.4 Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks
Lead or neoprene of 70 to 90 Shore “A” durometer hardness, chemically compatible

with sealant used, and of sizes recommended by the glass manufacturer.
2.2.5 Accessories
As required to provide a complete installation, including glazing point clips shams,

angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide non-corroding metal accessories. Provide
primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the glass and sealant manufacturers.
3.1 Precautions and Procedures
Determine the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual
opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth all edges of glass that will be exposed in
finish work. Leave labels in place until the installation is approved. Securely fix
movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has
thoroughly set.
3.2 Glass Setting
Items to be glazed shall be either shop or field glazed using glass of the quality and
thickness specified or indicated. Preparation and glazing, unless otherwise specified or
approved. Aluminum window may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing
methods described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face
puttying with no bedding will not be permitted. Handle and install glazing materials in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Use beads or stops, which are furnished
with the items to be glazed to secured the glass in place.
3.3 Cleaning
Thoroughly clean glass surfaces and removes labels paint spots, putty and other
defacement. Glass shall be clean at the time the work is accepted.
Page | 121
Glazing shall be measured by actual area of glass sheets installed respective of the
quality, type, and thickness in square meters based on the Plans and accepted to the
Glazing work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at
the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item

NO.
1012 (3) b.1 Tempered Glass Doors, Swing Type (12mm Thk sq.m.
Tempered Glass Door with Sidelight and Transom, In
Top and Bottom Stainless Steel Frame, 2- Double Leaf,
Type E= 6200mm W x 3500mm H
1012 (5) 6.a Tempered Glass Shower Partition, 1325mm L x set

1000mm W x 2000mm H (Location: Toilet 12.2-209 &
Toilet 12.2-211, Bldg 12.2)
Page | 122
ITEM 1014 PREFORMED METAL RIB TYPE ROOFING
1014.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all
preformed metal rib type roofing as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
The works shall include flashings, trims, accessories and other supplementary materials
required for a complete watertight and weather-tight installation.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Descriptive Data
Submit descriptive data on materials to be provided. Data shall be sufficient to indicate

conformance to specified requirements.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings showing erection and installation details, indicating type,
elevations, gauges, fastening and anchoring systems, and other construction details for
the following:
a. Roof
b. Flashings and Trims
c. Joint sealing
d. Fastener layouts and sizes
e. Corners
f. Supports
g. Anchorage
h. Closure and special details
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Certificates of Conformance

Submit certificates for all materials to be provided under this section.
1.2.4 Color Sample

Submit two (2) samples of each color indicated or specified.
Deliver, store, and handle panels and other manufactured products to prevent
damage. Stack materials stored on the site on platform or pallets and cover with
tarpaulins or other suitable weather-tight covering. Store panels so that water,
which might have accumulated during transit or storage, will drain off; do not
Page | 123
store the panels in contact with materials that might cause staining. Inspect the
panels upon arrival to the job site; if wet, remove the moisture and restack and
protect the panels until used.
1.4 Factory Tests
The manufacturer shall have conducted tests on previously manufactured sheets

of the same type and finish as proposed for the project to assure conformance
with quality requirements.
1.5 Guarantee
Submit a five (5) year paint warranty that the finished paint coating shall be free
of defects, fading color, cracking, flaking or any failure of color finish quality.
2.1 Roofing Panels
Roof panels shall be capable of supporting design loads between unsupported spans with
deflection not greater than 1/180 of the span width on roofs, but in no case shall the wall
thickness of the sheets of the panels be less than specified herein. Where gauges are
specified, they are subjected to normal manufacturing tolerances. Roofing panels shall
be long span exposed screw type roofing system similar to “DN Hi-Rib 1030” with a
total coated thickness of not less than 0.60 mm (ga.24) utilizing a double baked-on epoxy
primer with high grade polyester color finish.
2.1.1 Coated Steel
2.1.1.1 Core: Form sheets of galvanized steel with alloy coating of 55% aluminum,
43.4% zinc and 1.6% silicon. Coating standard shall conform to AZ 150
(150gm/m2) and ASTM A-792.
2.1.1.2 Pre-finished Coating
Shall be factory applied. Finish coating shall feature a double baked-on epoxy primer
with high-grade polyester coatings providing excellent weather, corrosion, stain and
chemical resistance, and having passed all standard test requirements. Coating shall have
a minimum topcoat of 20 microns for exterior surfaces and not less than 8 microns for
back coat finish. Exterior color shall be blue as selected and approved by the Owner
and/or Architect.
2.2 Accessories
Page | 124
Sheet metal flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, caps, splash pans, and other similar
sheet metal accessories used in conjunction with preformed metal panels shall be made
of the same material and finish as used for the panels, except that such accessories which
will be concealed after installation, may be provided without the finish if they are
aluminum- or zinc coated steel. Thickness of the metal shall be not less than that used for
the panels. Molded closure strips shall be closed cell or solid cell synthetic rubber,
neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride pre-molded to match the configurations of the preformed
metal panels. Finish color for flashings, trims, moldings, caps, and other exterior metal
components shall be the same as that of the roofing panels.
2.3 Fasteners
Fasteners for attaching panels to structural supports and to adjoining panels shall be as
approved and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless specified
otherwise, the fasteners shall be self tapping screws, bolts and nuts, self-locking rivets,
self-locking bolts, end welded studs, bolted or riveted studs, or step rivets held by steel
straps. Design the fastenings system to withstand the design loads indicated. Fasteners,
with the exception of those having integral hexagonal washer heads and those having
aluminum drive caps, shall have composite metal and neoprene washers. Fasteners
having integral hexagonal washer heads and fasteners having aluminum drive caps shall
have polychloroprene washers.
2.3.1 Screws
Not less than No. 14 diameter self tapping type or self drilling and self tapping type.
2.3.2 Blind Rivets
Stainless steel with 5 mm (3/16 inch) nominal diameter shank or aluminum with 5 mm
(3/16 inch) nominal diameter shank. Use threaded stem type rivets for other than the
fastening of trim. Rivets with hollow stems shall be closed.
2.3.3 Bolts
Not less than 6mm (1/4 inch) diameter, shouldered or plan shank required, with nuts
2.3.4 Joint Sealing Material

Joint sealing material shall be as recommended by roofing panel manufacturer.
3.1 Installation
Install in accordance with the manufacturers approved erection instructions and

diagrams, except as specified otherwise herein. Panels shall be in full and firm contact
with supports and with each other at side and end laps. Where sheets are cut in the field
or where any of the factory applied coverings or coatings are abraded or damaged in
Page | 125
handling or installation, they shall, after the necessary repairs have been made with
material of the same type as the weather coating, be approved before installation. All cut
ends and edges, including those at openings through the sheets, shall be sealed
completely. Defects or errors in the materials shall be corrected in an approved manner.
Remove materials which cannot be corrected in an approved manner and provide non-
defective materials. Provide molded closure strips where indicated and whenever sheets
terminate with open ends after installation.
3.1.1 Roofing Sheets
Apply roofing sheets with the configurations parallel to the slope of the roof and as
indicated on drawings. Provide roofing sheets in the longest lengths obtainable, with end
laps occurring only at structural members with no transverse joints except at the juncture
of ventilators, roof hatch, and similar openings. Lay all side laps away from the
prevailing wind and seal side and end laps with joint sealing material. Flash and seal the
roof at the ridge, at eaves and rakes, at projections through the roof, and elsewhere as
necessary. Accomplish the placement of closure strips, flashing, and sealing material in
an approved manner that will assure complete weather tightness.
3.1.2 Flashings
All flashing and related closures and accessories in connection with the preformed metal
panels shall be provided as indicated and as necessary to provide a watertight installation.
Details of installation that are not indicated shall be in accordance with the panel
manufacturer's printed instructions and details or the approved shop drawings.
Installation shall allow for expansion and contraction of flashing.
3.1.3 Fasteners
Fastener spacing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as

necessary to withstand the design loads indicated. Install fasteners in valleys or crowns
as recommended by the manufacturer of the sheet being used. Install fasteners in straight
lines within a tolerance of 12 mm in the length of a bay. Drive exposed penetrating type
fasteners normal to the surface and to a uniform depth to seat gasketed washers properly
and drive so as not to damage factory-applied coating. Exercise extreme care in drilling
pilot holes for fastenings to keep drills perpendicular and centered in valleys or crowns,
as applicable. After drilling, remove metal filings and burrs from holes prior to installing
fasteners and washers. Torque used in applying fasteners shall not exceed that
recommended by the manufacturer. Remove sheets deformed or otherwise damaged by
overtorqued fastenings, and provide new sheets.
The work done under this Item shall be measured by actual area covered or installed with
preformed metal roofing - inclusive of sheet metal accessories and gutter - in square
meters and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 126
The area of preformed metal roofing - inclusive of sheet metal accessories and gutter in
square meters shall be paid for at the unit bid or contract unit price which payment shall
constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, and incidents necessary to
complete this Item.

NO.
1014 (1) c.1 Preformed Prepaintedl Metal Roofing, Galvalume Ga. 24, sq.m.
including Stainless Steel Gutter, Ga.22, bended materials,
flashings, ridge roll and other attachment accessories
necessary to complete work. (DN Hi Rib 1030)
1014 (1) c.2 Preformed Prepainted Metal Roofing, Galvalume Ga. 24, sq.m.
including Preformed Metal Gutter, Ga.24, bended
materials, flashings, ridge roll and other attachment
accessories necessary to complete work. (DN Hi Rib
1030)
1014 (1) c.5 Preformed Prepainted Metal Roofing, Galvalume Ga. 24, sqm.
including Rain Drip Mould Stopper, Ga.24, bended
materials, flashings, ridge roll and other attachment
accessories necessary to complete work. (DN Hi Rib
1030)
Page | 127
ITEM 1016 CEMENTITIOUS CAPILLARY/CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
1016.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of cementitious
capillary/crystalline waterproofing as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
Submit the following for approval
Submittal shall include material description and physical properties, application details,
and recommendations regarding shelf life, application procedures.
1.2.2 Samples
Submit mock-up samples.
1.3 System Performance Requirements
1.3.1 Performance Requirements, General: It is required that capillary/crystalline

waterproofing to be permanently watertight and complies with performance requirements
specified.
1.4.1 Engage an experienced installer who has completed capillary/crystalline waterproofing

applications similar in material, design and extend to that indicated for project and that
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance with a
minimum of five (5) years installation experience acceptable to manufacturer of primary
materials.
1.4.1.1 Certification as Installer: Obtain a written certification from the manufacturer of the
waterproofing system that the installer is qualified to install the specified waterproofing
system. Provide a copy of the certification to the Architect prior to the award of the
waterproofing work.
1.4.1.2 Installer’s Field Supervision: Require the installer to maintain a full-time
supervisor/foreman who is experienced in the installation of the waterproofing systems
similar to the type and scope required for this project and who shall also be at the jobsite
during the progress of the work.
1.5 Warranty
Page | 128
1.5.1 The waterproofing applicator shall provide an affidavit stating that the cementitious
capillary/crystalline waterproofing materials were applied in strict accordance with the
approved manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
1.5.2 Provide a written warranty that all work executed under this section will be free from
defects in materials, workmanship and free of leaks for a period of five (5) years from
date of acceptance unless resulting from structural defects or causes other than the work
of this section. Said defects shall be remedied by the applicator for the period of the
warranty without additional cost to the owner.
1.6.1 Protection: Provide a written warranty that all work executed under this section will be
free from defects in materials, workmanship and free of leaks for a period of five (5)
years from date of acceptance unless resulting from structural defects or causes other
than the work of this section. Said defects shall be remedied by the applicator for the
period of the warranty without additional cost to the owner.
1.6.2 Replacement: All broken containers and the contents of same shall be removed from
the premises and replaced with new materials at no additional cost to the owner.
2.1 Cementitious Capillary/Crystalline Waterproofing
2.1.1 Cementitious Capillary/Crystalline Waterproofing shall be factory formulated

crystalline waterproofing formulation of selected blends of cement fine quartz sand and
active chemical constituents providing a lasting imperviousness to water. In the
presence of moisture, the active chemical in the waterproofing coating penetrate
concrete and reacts chemically with free lime to produce insoluble crystals. This
product feature is permanently active. The crystalline growth reduces porosity by
blocking capillaries and filling hairline non-structural cracks caused by shrinkage or
expansion. In the presence of moisture, the waterproofing coating continuously forms
crystals. The cementitious capillary/crystalline waterproofing material shall be
“Sealproof CW by Sealbond Chemical Industries Inc.”
2.2 Product Performance Data
a. Property: ASTM C928M

b. Chloride Ion Content: ≤ 0.05%
c. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi-4,000 psi
d. Bond: 116- 120 psi
e. Carbonation Resistance: Passed
f. Modulus of Elasticity: ≥ 15Gpa
g. Dry Thermal Cycling: ≥ 0.8MPa
Page | 129
h. Capillary Absorption: ≤ 0,5kg/m2 –h0.5

i. Reaction to Fire: Class A1
j. Dangerous Substances: Non-toxic materials
k. Water Permeability: Impermeable up to 404-410 ft
water pressure
(Method CRD-C-48-73)
l. Chemical Resistance: Limited to 15% sulfuric
Acid (Method: ASTM C267)
2.3 Technical Data
a. Appearance: Light Grey

b. Workability @ 23o C 30 minutes
c. VOC 0 g/L
d. Setting Time @ 23o C 2-3 hours
3.1 Surface Preparation
Surface must be thoroughly clean and free from other contaminants. Slightly damp the
surface prior to application of waterproofing coating.
3.2 Mixing
Mix 1 part clean water to 3 parts powder. Mix thoroughly with a slow speed drill
equipped with a paddle.
3.3 Application
Apply two coats of waterproofing coating by brush or roller. Apply first coating
vertically and the second coating horizontally to fill up voids that was not sealed during
the first coating. Spray clean water to the applied surface to facilitate the curing
waterproofing coating. Allow to cure for 3-7 days.
3.3.1 Brush: Ensure that the cavities in the substrate are filled.
3.3.2 Spray Application: Waterproofing coating can be applied with a suitable fine mortar
spraying device. For maximum spray pattern, it should be possible to adjust of product
as well as air pressure and volume. The nozzle diameter should be approximately 4 mm.
3.5 Curing
3.5.1 Waterproofing treated surfaces should be keep damp for a period of at least two (2) to
three (3) days and provide protection against extreme weather conditions. The
Page | 130
waterproofing application has to be aged for a minimum period of two (2) weeks before
application of surface finishes.
3.6 Cleaning
3.6.1 Upon completion of all waterproofing operations, remove all equipment and debris
resulting from work of this section.
installed with cementitious capillary/crystalline waterproofing and accepted to the
Cementitious capillary/crystalline waterproofing work is determined and provided in the

Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment
constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

NO.
1016 (1) b.6 Waterproofing: Cementitous Capillary (Location: Concrete sq.m.

Canopies, Watertank, Elevaror Shaft)
Page | 131
ITEM 1016 CONCRETE SEALER
1016.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of concrete sealer
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including basic materials
analysis and application instructions for material specified.
Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' original containers,

unopened, with brand names, date of manufacture and material designation clearly
marked thereon. Concrete floor sealer containers shall be labeled as to type and use.
Carefully, handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.
2.1 Materials
Provide materials conforming to specifications and the requirement specified.
2.1.1 Concrete floor sealer shall have a transparent, non-toxic, noncombustible, non-
flammable, chemically reactive, water-based sealer that penetrates concrete and
masonry building materials, protecting, preserving and strengthening them
permanently by:
a. Curing - controls hairline checking and temperature cracking on new

concrete.
b. Sealing - penetrates deep into the concrete forming a chemical reaction that
locks the pores from within, providing a deep permanent seal on all types
of concrete.
c. Hardening – solidifies the component parts of the concrete into one solid
mass, increasing the density, toughness, hardness and substantially
increasing the abrasion resistance and durability of the concrete surface.
d. Dust proofing – chemically reacts with the salts in the concrete, permanently
eliminating the release of concrete dust through the surface pores
e. Neutralizing – progressively penetrates the concrete and neutralizes the
alkalis.
Page | 132
f. Bonding – prepares the treated surface for paints, caulking compounds,

adhesives and floor covering.
2.1.2 Concrete floor sealer shall be straight to finish polish concrete “Ashford Formula”
or approved equal.
Freshly finished concrete surfaces requires no surface preparation if the “Ashford

Formula” is to be applied as a curing agent immediately after the finishing operation
on areas where forms are recently removed, all form of oil and breaking compounds
residue must be removed so as not to inhibit the penetration of the concrete sealer into
the surface. Concrete sealer shall be applied in temperatures from 1.7oC to 57oC.
3.2 Application Instruction
3.2.1 Immediately following the troweling operation, and as soon as the slab is safe to walk
on, saturate the surface with the concrete sealer “Ashford Formula” at approximately 5
sq m per liter using a low pressure, high volume sprayer. The concrete sealer may also
be applied by pouring it directly on the surface and spreading it evenly with a soft-
bristled broom. Enough material must on the surface to allow the concrete sealer to
thoroughly soak in. As a guideline, there should be enough concrete sealer on the floor
to fill-in a footprint within several seconds of taking a step. This is often referred to as
a flood coat or wet coat. Once a wet coat has been achieved, work the concrete sealer
into the concrete with soft-bristled brooms. This step breaks surface and aids
penetration.
3.2.2 Keep the surface wet with the concrete sealer for a minimum of 30 minutes, and then
wait for the concrete sealer to become slippery and gel-like under foot. In extremely
cool, windless conditions, it can take up to 1 hour or longer to become slippery. In
extreme hot conditions, the concrete sealer may begin to become slippery before 30-
minute soak-in period. Additional concrete sealer must be applied to the concrete in
order to keep all areas of the concrete surface wet with the sealer for at least 15 to 20
minutes before becoming slippery in these hot conditions. No spot or area on the slab
should be allowed to dry during the soak in period. Pay particular attention to porous
areas and slab edges, as these tend to dry out more quickly.
3.2.3 Immediately after the concrete sealer becomes slippery, lightly mist the surface with
water. This can be done either with a low-pressure sprayer or with a hose and nozzle.
Nozzle should be adjusted to create a mist. Agitate the floor with a broom to aid the
penetration of the concrete sealer and wait to become slippery or gel-like a second time.
Thoroughly flush the surface with water. During the flushing process, the floor should
be agitated with brooms to help loosen and remove excess concrete sealer from the
surface.
Page | 133
3.2.4 Thoroughly squeegee the slab by pushing the water ahead of you off the slab edge. If
there are still some slippery patches during the squeegee process, re flushed and
squeegees again these areas until the entire surface is dry. At this point, the floor
should look like bare concrete with nothing on it.
installed with concrete sealer and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Concrete sealer work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for
Item.

NO.
1016 (3) Concrete Sealer sq.m.
Page | 134
ITEM 1016 ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING COATING, LIQUID APPLIED
1016.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1. Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of elastomeric
waterproofing coating, liquid applied as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
Submit the following for approval:
Include material description and physical properties, application details, and

recommendations regarding self life, application procedures, and precautions on
flammability and toxicity. Submit the following for approval:
1.2.1.1 Liquid-applied membrane component including primers.
1.2.1.2 Elastomeric coating
1.2.1.3 Cleaner, activating solvent
1.2.3 Samples
Submit mock-up samples for each waterproofing type.
Deliver manufactured waterproofing materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened

containers, with labels intact and legible. Containers of materials covered by referenced
specification number shall bear the specification number, type, and class of the contents.
Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and
protect materials in sufficient quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and
protect materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and use within their
indicated label. Promptly remove from the site materials or incomplete work adversely
affected by moisture exposure. Use pallets and canvas tarpaulins to cover stored
materials top to bottom.
Apply materials when there is no surface moisture, or visible dampness on the substrate
surface. Ensure the air temperature remains above the temperature recommended by the
manufacturer. Moisture test for substrate is specified under “Field Tests”. Work may be
performed within heated enclosures, provided the surface temperature of the substrate is
Page | 135
maintained at a minimum temperature recommended by the manufacturer, for 24 hours

prior to the application of the waterproofing, and remains above that the temperature
during the cure period recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 Waterproofing Conference
Prior to starting application of the waterproofing system arrange a pre-waterproofing

conference to ensure a clear understanding of drawings and specifications. The owner
shall be given 7 days advance written notice of the time and place of meeting. The
contractor, mechanical and electrical sub-contractor, the flashing sheets metal sub-
contractor, and other trades that may do other types of work on or over the membrane
after installation shall attend this conference.
1.6.1 Engage an experienced installer who has completed elastomeric waterproofing

applications similar in material, design and extend to that indicated for project and that
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance with a
minimum of five (5) years installation experience acceptable to manufacturer of primary
materials.
1.6.1.1 Certification as Installer
Obtain a written certification from the manufacturer of the waterproofing system that the
installer is qualified to install the specified waterproofing system. Provide a copy of the
certification to the Architect prior to the award of the waterproofing work.
1.6.1.2 Installer’s Field Supervision

Require the installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is experienced in
the installation of the waterproofing systems similar to the type and scope required for
this project and who shall also be at the jobsite during the progress of the work.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 The waterproofing applicator shall provide an affidavit stating that all elastomeric
waterproofing materials were applied in strict accordance with the approved
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Page | 136
2.1 Elastomeric Waterproofing Coating
Elastomeric Waterproofing Coating shall be high performance UV resistant water based

coating formulated based on 100 percent Acrylic Emulsion for use as waterproofing
coating on walls and roofs. It possesses outstanding exterior durability and excellent
elasticity and elongation properties necessary to bridge forthcoming hairline cracks
without cracking or wrinkling. Elastomeric waterproofing coating shall be
“BONDFLEX EWD by Sealbond Chemical Industries Inc.”
2.1.1 Membrane Primer
Primers, unless specifically prohibited by the manufacturer of the liquid-applied

membrane, are required and shall be as recommended by the liquid-applied membrane
waterproofing manufacturer.
2.2 General Data
Volume Solids 45 ± 3
TheoreticalCoverage Approximately 12-15 sqm/gal/coat.
Elongation @ Break 300-500% (ASTM D412-92)
Adhesion 100% Retention (ASTM D3359)
Tensile Strength 1.5-2.0 N/mm2 (ASTM D412-920
Hardness 20-24 Type A (ASTM D2240)
Color White, Gray, Beige
Finish Sheen
2.3 Technical Data
PROPERTY DATA
% Solids 100%
Solvents 0 (Zero)
Permeability Impermeable
Flash Point Non-flammable
Density 1.57 kg/L
VOC 94.3 g/L (SGS VOC Tested)
2.4 Sealant
As specified in Item, “Sealant and Calking”.
Page | 137
2.5 Sealant Primer
As specified in Item, “Sealant and Calking”
2.6 Joint Filler
ASTM D1751 or D1752
2.7 Bond Breaker
As recommended by the manufacturer of the liquid-applied membrane waterproofing.

The bond breaker shall not interfere with the curing process or other performance
properties of the liquid-applied membrane waterproofing.
2.8 Elastomeric Sheet
Preformed sheet shall be as recommended by the liquid-applied membrane manufacturer.

The bond strength between the liquid-applied membrane and the preformed elastomeric
sheet shall be not less than 6.9 MP2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C836.
2.9 Elastomeric Sheet Adhesive
As recommended by the elastomeric waterproofing sheet manufacturer.
3.1 Preparation
Coordinate the work with that of other trades to assure that components to be incorporated
into the waterproofing system are available when needed. Inspect and approve surfaces
immediately before the application of the waterproofing materials. Free concrete
surfaces of laitance, loose aggregate, sharp projections, grease, oil, dirt, curing
compounds, and other contaminants that could adversely affect the complete bonding of
the liquid-applied membrane waterproofing to the concrete surface.
3.1.1 Flashings
Do not begin application until penetrations through the structural slab are in place, and
until sleeves are placed through the slab and are made watertight.
3.1.1.1 Drains
Drain flanges shall be flush with the surface of the structural slab. Apply a full
elastomeric sheet around the drain, with edges fully adhered to the drain flange and to the
structural slab. The elastomeric sheet shall not be adhered over the joint between the
drain and the concrete slab. Take care not to plug any drainage of weep holes. Cover
Page | 138
the elastomeric sheet with liquid-applied waterproofing during waterproofing

application. The elastomeric sheet shall be adhered a minimum of 100 mm into the
horizontal deck. Cover this portion of the elastomeric during waterproofing application.
3.1.1.2 Other Penetration and Projections
Flash penetrations and projections, including vents and service pipes, through the
structural slab with an elastomeric sheet adhered to the concrete slab and the penetration.
The elastomeric sheet shall be leaved unadhered for 25 mm over the joint between the
penetration and the concrete slab. The elastomeric sheet shall be adhered a minimum of
100 mm into the horizontal deck. Cover the elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied
waterproofing during the waterproofing application.
3.1.1.3 Walls and Vertical Surfaces
Flash wall intersections which are not of monolithic pour or constructed with reinforced
concrete joints with an elastomeric sheet adhered to both the vertical wall surface and the
concrete slab. Intersections that are monolithic pour or constructed with reinforced
concrete joints with an elastomeric sheet adhered to both the vertical wall surface and the
concrete slab can be flashed with a vertical grade of liquid-applied waterproofing
membrane. Leave the sheet unadhered for a distance of 0.30 meter from the corner on
both the vertical and horizontal surfaces. Cover the elastomeric sheet with liquid-applied
waterproofing during waterproofing application.
3.1.2 Cracks and Joints
Prepare visible cracks and joints in the substrate to receive application of the
waterproofing membrane by separating these joints from the waterproofing membrane
by placing bond breaker and an elastomeric slip between the membrane and the substrate.
Cracks that show movement shall receive a 50 mm bond breaker followed by an
elastomeric sheet adhered to the deck. Non-moving cracks shall be double coated with
the liquid-applied waterproofing.
3.1.3 Priming
Apply primer on surfaces to receive the liquid-applied waterproofing membrane. Apply

the primer as required by the membrane manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3.2 Special Precautions
Protect components during transport and application of waterproofing materials. Do not

dilute primers and other materials, unless specifically recommended by the materials
manufacturer. Keep containers closed except when removing the contents. Do not allow
contact of various materials through mixing of remains and dual use of application
equipment for mixing and transporting materials. Do not permit equipment on the project
site that has residue of materials on previous projects. Use cleaners for cleaning, not for
Page | 139
thinning primers of membrane materials. Ensure that workers and other who walk on the
cured membrane wear clean, soft-soled shoes to avoid damaging the waterproofing
materials.
3.3 Application
Over the primed surfaces, provide a uniform, monolithic coating of liquid-applied

membrane by following the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Apply material by
trowel, squeegee, roller, brush, spray apparatus, or other method acceptable to the
membrane manufacturer. Check wet film thickness as specified under “Field Tests”, and
adjust application rate as necessary to provide a uniform coating of the thickness
specified. Where possible, mark off the surface to be coated in even units to facilitate
proper coverage. At expansion joints, control joints, prepared cracks, and termination,
carry the membrane over the preformed elastomeric sheet in a uniform 60 mils thick, plus
or minus 5 mils, wet thickness to provide a monolithic coating. When work has stopped
long enough for the membrane to cure, begin the next application by wiping the
previously applied materials with a solvent so that accumulated dirt and dust, which could
inhibit adhesion of the overlapping membrane coat, is removed. Use solvent
recommended by the membrane manufacturer, as approved.
3.3.1 Work Sequence
Perform the work so that protection board is installed prior to using the waterproofed
surface. Do not permanently install protection board until the membrane has passed the
flood test specified under “Field Tests”. Move material storage areas as work progresses
to prevent abuse of the membrane and overloading the structural deck.
3.3.2 Protection Board
Protect the liquid-applied membrane by placing protection board over the membrane.
Timing of placement shall fall within the parameters established by the fluid-applied
membrane manufacturer. Protect membrane application if the protection board is not
placed immediately. Butt protection boards together and do not overlap. Protection board
shall be 10 thick fiber cement board.
3.4 Field Tests
3.4.1 Moisture Test
Prior to application of the waterproofing, check moisture content of substrate with

moisture meter. An acceptable device is the Delmhorst Moisture Meter, Model
BD7/2E/CS, and Type 21 E. Similar meters by other manufacturers, which are suitable
for the purpose, may be used as approved. Do not begin application until the meter
reading indicates “dry” range or similar reading indicating that substrate is suitably dry.
3.4.2 Film Thickness
Page | 140
Check wet film thickness every 10 square meters during application by placing flat metal
plates on the substrate or using a mil-thickness gauge especially manufactured for the
purpose.
3.4.3 Flood Test
After application and curing is complete, plug drains and fill the waterproofed area with
water to a depth of 50 mm. A minimum 48-hour cure time shall be required prior to flood
testing in order to ensure full cure of the membrane and adhesive prior to subjecting them
to full flood test of water. Allow water to stand 24 hours. Test the water tightness by
carefully measuring the water level at the beginning and end of the 24-hour period. In
the event that the water level falls drain the water, allow the installation to dry, and
inspect. Make repairs or replace as required and repeat the test. Work shall not proceed
before approval of repairs of replacement.
3.5 Areas of Application
3.5.1 5 Ply Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing or approved equal, buried type

waterproofing.
3.5.1.1 60 mils for all roof deck areas as required and indicated on the drawings with 50 x 50 x
3 mm wires mesh reinforcement and 50 mm thick concrete topping.
3.5.1.2 40 mils for all upper floor toilets as required & indicated in the drawings.
3.5.2 3 ply elastomeric membrane waterproofing or approved equal, exposed traffic type
elastomeric waterproofing.
3.5.2.1 32 mils for roof deck areas with minor pedestrian traffic.
3.5.2.2 25 mils for concrete gutters and deck areas with minimal to no pedestrian traffic.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in square meters for areas
actually installed with elastomeric waterproofing system, fluid applied and accepted to
Elastomeric waterproofing system, fluid applied work is determined and provided in

the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and
payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and
other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Page | 141

NO.
1016 (1) b.1 Waterproofing: Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing, sq.m.
Burried Type (60 mils)
1016 (1) b.2 Waterproofing: Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing, sq.m.

Exposed Type (Traffic Type)
1016 (1) b.3 Waterproofing: Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing sq.m.

(40 mils on Suspended Toilets)
1016 (1) b.4 Waterproofing: Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing sq.m.

(25 mils on Concrete Gutters)
Page | 142
ITEM 1016 INTEGRAL CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

(CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING BY CRYSTALLIZATION)
1016.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of integral
crystalline waterproofing as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Proprietary Item: CWS ADMIX™
General Spec: Integral Crystalline Waterproofing
Supplier: Concrete Waterproofing Systems
Applicator: MBTechno solutions Corporation
1.2.1 Performance Requirements, General: It is required that integral crystalline

waterproofing to be permanently watertight and complies with performance
requirements.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 General: All submittals for approval as indicated herein shall be in accordance to the
provisions under General Conditions of the Contract Documents.
1.3.2 Submit manufacturer's certification that proposed materials, details and systems as
indicated and specified fully comply with manufacturer's details and specifications. If
any portions of Contract Documents do not conform to manufacturer's standard
recommendations, submit notification of portions of design that are at variance with
manufacturer's specifications.
1.3.3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications for
each product including laboratory tests.
1.3.4 Trial Mix: Recommended use of trial mix to establish optimum mix design for specific
project.
1.3.5 Samples: 300 mm x 300 mm minimum size, of this type of waterproofing system
specified for project.
Page | 143
1.4.1 Comply with quality assurance requirements under General Conditions of the Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s instructions.
1.4.2 Manufacturer Qualifications: The products nominated must have been manufactured for
a minimum ten (10) years.
1.4.3 Installer Qualifications: Installers must have received training from the Manufacturer
and be an Approved Applicator of the manufacturer.
1.5.1 Comply with product delivery requirements under General Conditions of the Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s instructions.
1.5.2 Delivery: Materials shall be delivered in original sealed containers, clearly marked with
brand name and type of materials.
1.5.3 Storage: Store as for cement, in dry, cool conditions. Store materials according to
manufacturer’s instruction in unopened containers and protected from moisture.
1.6 Warranty
1.6.1 Project Warranty: Manufacturer and Applicator shall both provide project warranties of
twenty (20) years.
2.1 Cementitious Waterproofing by Crytallization
Cementitious Waterproofing by Crystallization shall be a permanent, crystalline capillary

waterproofing admixture that is added to new concrete during batching to waterproof and
protect concrete for the life of the structure that can withstand hydrostatic pressure, vapor
permeable, non-toxic and no VOC’s. To seal existing and future hairline cracks up to
0.4mm.
2.2 Dosage
a. General: CWS Admix should be added to the concrete at the time of batching.
b. Dosage Rate: CWS Admix should be added at the rate of 0.8 kg per cubic meter
of concrete (0.80 kg/m³); approximately 22 oz per yard³.
c. Admixtures: CWS Admix is compatible with other concrete admixtures such as

plasticisers, accelerators and air-entrainers. As with all crystalline admixtures,
Page | 144
CWS Admix may retard setting times. Therefore, care must be taken when
adding water-reducers or plasticisers that may retard the setting time as that
could result in a combined effect of several products retarding the set. Always
conduct a trial mix under project conditions to determine the setting time and
strength of the concrete.
3.1 Project Conditions
a. Follow Manufacturer’s Instructions and standard installation procedures
b. Coordinate waterproofing/lining work with work of other trades. Provide

materials and accessories in timely manner so as not to delay the Work.
c. Crack Control: All reinforcement and concretes shall be in accordance with

applicable standards for structural concrete to minimize cracking.
d. Setting Time and Strength: CWS Admix may retard setting times and may result
in a slight increase in compressive strength. The amount of set time will depend
on numerous factors including weather, mix design, dosage rate of the
admixture, and the effect of other admixes on the setting time. Therefore, care
must be taken when adding other admixes such as water-reducers or plasticisers
that may retard the setting time as that could result in a combined effect of several
products retarding the set. It is essential to always conduct a trial mix under
project conditions to determine the setting time and strength of the concrete.
e. Weather: Extremes of weather will affect the mixing, cartage and placement
of concrete. Where projects are being carried out in very high or low
temperatures, follow practices such as ACI 305R (Hot Weather Concreting) and
ACI 306R (Cold Weather Concreting).
3.2 Application
a. Mixing: CWS Admix™ should be added to the concrete at the batch plant at the
rate of 0.8kg/m³(approximately 22oz per yard³). If local conditions do not allow
addition of CWS Admix at the batch plant, it may be added directly to the
concrete truck. In such cases, continue to mix for a minimum of 10 minutes to
ensure even distribution of CWS Admix throughout the concrete mix. Approved
applicators will supervise all dosing requirements on behalf of the client.
b. Construction Joints/Expansion Joints/Penetrations: All joints and penetrations

must be sealed with an appropriate water stop such as a bentonite swelling water
stop or equivalent.
Page | 145
c. Concrete Vibration: It is essential that the concrete is properly vibrated and

compacted. Should the concrete not be properly compacted it will be necessary
to chip out and rectify areas of honeycombing after pouring.
d. Curing: Concrete should be moist cured using mist spray or sprinkler for up to
7 days in accordance with ACI 308. Alternatively curing compounds may be
used that comply with ASTM C-309 or alternative standard.
e. Defective Concrete: Concrete defects shall be repaired in accordance with

industry standards. All areas of honeycombing shall be repaired.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in kilograms for concrete actually
mixed with integral waterproofing and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Concrete with integral waterproofing mixture work is determined and provided in the
Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment
PAY DESCRIPTION UNIT

ITEM NO.
1016 (1) b.7 Waterproofing:Integral Crystalline kg.
Page | 146
ITEM 1016 MODIFIED MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
1016.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of modified
membrane waterproofing system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2.1 Provide sheet-waterproofing products which have been produced and

installed to establish and maintain watertight continuous seals.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Submit complete technical product data and general recommendations from
waterproofing materials manufacturer. Include data substantiating that materials comply
with requirements.
1.3.2 Shop drawings: Provide installation shop drawings for each type of applications required
and nay other detail as required by the Architect.
1.4.1 Installer firm shall have a minimum five (5) years of successful experience in installation
of waterproofing similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to
manufacturer of primary waterproofing materials.
1.4.2 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary waterproofing materials of each type
required from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended
by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.5.1 Substrate: Proceed with work after substrate condition, openings and penetrating work
have been completed.
1.5.2 Weather: Proceed with waterproofing and associated work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.
1.6 Warranty
Page | 147
1.6.1 Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the waterproofing material before,
during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other
trades, contiguous to the waterproofed surfaces. Packaged containers shall be stored
on wooden skids150 mm off the ground and covered with heavy plastic sheeting which
shall remain in place at all times.
1.6.2 Replacement: All broken containers and the contents of same shall be removed from
the premises, discarded in legal fashion and replaced with new materials at no
additional cost to the owner.
1.7 Performance Requirements
1.7.1 It is required that waterproof membranes are watertight and not deteriorate in
excess of limitations published by manufacturer.
1.7.2 In-place testing: Before complete membranes on horizontal surfaces are turned-over,
test for leaks with 50mm depth of water maintained for 24 hours. Repair any leaks
revealed by examination of substructure and repeat test until no leakage is observed.
1016.2 MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 Modified Membrane Waterproofing
Shall be factory formulated torch applied modified membrane manufactured from

premium grade heavily modified bitumen, reinforced with a core of woven, non-woven
polyester fabric. The core gives the membrane its excellent mechanical properties,
allows for good elongation and affords high resistance to piercing. The modified
membrane waterproofing material shall be “Vangard Membrane Waterproofing” by
“Rebtrade International Corp.” or approved equal.
2.2 Auxiliary Material
2.2.1 Primers: provide type of concrete primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet

waterproofing material for applications required.
2.2.2 Flashing materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide types of flexible sheet
material for flashing as recommended by waterproofing sheet manufacturer.
Page | 148
3.1 Preparation of Substrate
3.1.1 General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for surface preparation.
3.1.2 Prior to installation of waterproofing and associated work, meet at project site with
installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency
representative (if any), and installers of work requiring coordination with
waterproofing work. Review material selections and procedures to be followed in
performing work.
3.1.3 On concrete decks, immediately before placement of waterproofing sheet, grind or

abrasive blast surface lightly to ensure removal of projections which might penetrate
sheet or curing compounds which would interfere with fully bonded systems. Clean
deck of loose material by brooming and vacuuming.
3.1.4 On vertical surfaces, chip off projections where necessary for proper placement and
adhesion of waterproofing sheet.
3.1.5 Apply primer to concrete and masonry surfaces at rate recommended by manufacturer
of primary waterproofing materials. Apply primer only on areas which will be applied
with waterproofing membrane on the same working day. Re-prime areas not covered
by waterproofing within 24 hours.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for handling and installation of sheet
waterproofing materials.
3.2.2 Coordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated work to provide

complete system complying with combined recommendations of manufacturers and
installers involved in work. Schedule installation to minimize period of exposure of
sheet waterproofing materials.
3.2.3 Extend waterproofing sheet and flashings as shown to provide complete membrane
over area indicated to be waterproofed. Seal to projections through membrane and seal
seams.
3.2.4 Expansion joints: Install joint filler as recommended by manufacturer, with protruding
rounded surface. Apply continuous 203mm wide strip of membrane on joint followed
by membrane application.
Page | 149
3.3 Cleaning
3.1 After completion, remove any masking materials and stains from exposed surfaces
caused by waterproofing installation.
actually installed with modified membrane waterproofing system and accepted to the
Modified membrane waterproofing system work is determined and provided in the Bill
of Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment
1016 (1) b.4 Waterproofing: Modified Bitumen Membrane sq.m.
Page | 150
ITEM 1018 CERAMIC TILE
1018.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including equipment
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of all ceramic
tile-work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of each type of floor and wall tiles including all required beads,
moulding, and trim units.
1.3.1 Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacture’s unopened containers fully
identified with manufacturer’s name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.
1.3.2 Store materials in unopened containers off ground and under cover, protected from
damage.
1.4 Extra Stock
Supply on extra two percent of each type of tile used in clean, marked cartoons for
emergency use.
2.1 Materials
All tile materials shall be of the best of their respective kinds, in sizes and colors as
shown on the plans, details and finish schedules or otherwise specified herein or as will
be approved by the Architect upon submission of samples. Samples of all tiles shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval before placing orders. All tiles shall be
delivered to the jobsite in unopened grade-sealed containers.
2.1.1 Color and Patterns
Tile colors and patterns shall be as selected. Colors and patterns by reference to
manufacturer’s name and designations are for color and pattern identification only and
Page | 151
are not intended to limit selection of other manufacture’s products with similar color
and patterns.
2.1.2 Floor Tile
2.1.2.1 Unglazed Ceramic Tile
Unglazed ceramic tile size shall be vitrified floor tiles, porcelain or natural clay with
cushioned edges. Size shall be as indicated on the drawings and colors shall be as selected
by the architect.
2.1.3 Wall Tile
2.1.3.1 Glazed Ceramic Tile
Glazed ceramic tiles shall be bright or matte finish with cushioned edges. Size shall be
as indicated on the drawings and colors shall be as selected by the architect.
Glazed ceramic tiles to be used specifically for swimming pool shall be “Mariwasa” or
approved equal. Color shall be blue and white.
2.1.4 Trim Strips: Provide matching Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) trim units with tile work.
Provide where indicated and where necessary for a complete and neatly finished
installation.
2.2 Hydrated Lime
ASTM C206, Type S; or ASTM C207, Type S.
2.3 Sand
ASTM C144, for mortar setting beds, grouting and pointing.
2.4 Water
Water shall be clean and potable.
2.5 Portland Cement
ASTM C1500, Type I, white for grout, gray for others use.
3.1 Installation
Page | 152
Do not start tile work until roughing in for plumbing and electrical work has been
completed and tested. All surfaces to receive tile-work shall be cleaned of loose
materials and given proper surface preparation prior to ceramic tile-work. Prepare and
install in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and ANSI A108.5.
3.1.1 Application of Scratch Coat
3.1.1.1 Thoroughly dampen, but not saturate, surfaces of masonry or concrete walls before
applying the scratch coat. Make surface areas appear slightly damp. Allow no free water
on the surface.
3.1.1.2 On masonry, first apply a thin coat with great pressure, then bring it out sufficiently to
compensate for the major irregularities on the masonry surfaces to a thickness of not less
than 6 mm at any point.
3.1.1.3 Evenly rake scratch coats, but not dash coats, to provide good mechanical key for
subsequent course before the mortar has fully hardened.
3.1.1.4 On surfaces not sufficiently rough to provide good mechanical key, dash on the first coat
with a whisk by broom or fiber brush using a strong whipping motion. Do not travel or
otherwise disturb mortar applied by dashing until it is hardened.
3.1.2 Floor Tile Installation on Mortar Bed
3.1.2.1 Before spreading the setting bed, establish lines of borders and center the fieldwork in
both directions to permit the pattern to be laid with a minimum of cut tiles.
3.1.2.2 Clean concrete sub-floor then moisture but not soak. Afterwards sprinkle dry cement over
the surface and spread the mortar on the setting bed.
3.1.2.3 Mix mortar 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand. Tamp to assure good bond over the
entire area and screed to provide a smooth and level bed at proper height and slope.
3.1.2.4 Pitch floor to drains as required.
3.1.2.5 After setting bed has set sufficiently to be worked over sprinkle dry cement over surface
and lay tile.
3.1.2.6 Keep the joints parallel and straight over the entire area by using straight edges.
3.1.2.7 Tamp the tile solidly onto the bed, using wood blocks of size to ensure solid bedding free
from depressions.
3.1.2.8 Lay tiles from center outward and make adjustments at walls.
3.1.3 Wall Tile Installation on Mortar Bed
Page | 153
3.1.3.1 Before application of mortar bed, dampen the surface of the scratch coat evenly to obtain
uniform section.
3.1.3.2 Use temporary or spot grounds to control the thickness of the mortar bed. Fill out the
mortar bed even with the grounds and rod it to a true plane.
3.1.3.3 Apply the mortar bed over an area no greater than can be covered with tile while the coat
is still plastic.
3.1.3.4 Allow no single applications of mortar to 19 mm thick.
3.1.3.5 Completely immerse wall tile in clean water and soak it at least ½ hour. After removal,
stack tile on edge long enough to drain off excess water. Re-soak and drain individual
tiles then dry along edges. Allow no moisture to remain on the back of tile during setting.
3.1.3.6 Apply a bond coat 0.8 mm thick to the plastic setting bed or to the back of each sheet or
tile.
3.1.3.7 Press tile firmly into the bed and beat into place within 1 hour.
3.1.3.8 Lay tile field in rectangular block areas not exceeding 600 mm x 600 mm. cut the setting
bed through its entire depth along the edges of each block area after placement and before
subsequent blocks are installed.
3.1.3.9 Within 1 hour after installation of tile, remove strings from string-set tile and wet the
faces of face-mounted tile and remove the paper and glue. Avoid using excess water.
Adjust any tile that is out of alignment.
3.1.4 Grouting
3.1.4.1 After tile has sufficiently set, force a maximum of grout into joints by trowel, brush or
finger application.
3.1.4.2 Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion-edge tile to the depth of the cushion.
3.1.4.3 Fill all joints of square-edged tile flush with the surface of the tile. Fill all gaps or sips.
3.1.4.4 During grouting clean all excess grout off with clean burlap, other cloth or sponges.
3.2 Cleaning
Sponge and wash tile thoroughly with clean water after the grout has stiffened. Then
clean by rubbing with damp cloth or sponges and polish clean with dry cloth.
3.3 Protection
Page | 154
Cover finished tile floors with clean 13.6 kg. natural kraft paper before permitting foot
traffic. Place board walkways on floors that are to be continuously used as passageways
by workers. Protect tiled corners external angles, with board corner strips in areas used
as passageways by workers.
laid with ceramic tiles and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Ceramic tile work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
Item.

NO.
1018 (1) a Glazed Tiles (Wall Finish: Ceramic Tiles, 6mm Thk x 300 sq.m.
x 300mm)
1018 (1) b Glazed Tiles (Wall Finish: Ceramic Tiles, 6mm Thk x 400 sq.m.
x 400mm)
1018 (2) a Unglazed Tiles (Floor Finish: Ceramic Tiles, 6mm Thk x sq.m.
300 x 300mm)
1018 (2) b Unglazed Tiles (Floor Finish: Ceramic Tiles, 6mm Thk x sq.m.
400 x 400mm)
1018 (3) m Ceramic Tiles Countertop Slab ,6mm Thk x 200 x 200mm l.m.
(Location: Kitchen/ Pantry)
Page | 155
ITEM 1018 GRANITE WORKS
1018.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of granite works as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
Submit samples of granite slab and other accessories for approval.
All granite slabs shall be unloaded and delivered to the site, with all necessary care in
handling being maintained to avoid soiling or damaging, when stored, granite slab shall
be clear of the ground and adequately protected from all elements. The cut granite slab
shall be carefully packed for transportation with the exercise of all customer practical and
reasonable precautions against damage in transit.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Granite slab shall be the best obtainable under its respective classification and shall be
natural, hard, durable, resistant to acids, free from stains, porous streaks, and other defects
and shall contain nothing which would cause discoloration. Veins shall be tight and
sound. Granite shall be 20 mm thick minimum, type and color shall be cut to CS size
and selected Architect and/or Owner.
2.1.2 Cement for mortar setting bed shall be Portland cement.
2.1.3 Grout shall be the best quality and shall be as recommended by granite slab supplier.
2.1.4 Sand shall be natural, clean, and free from soluble salts and organic matter, fine grade.
2.1.5 Portland cement, gray or natural color for mortar setting beds and scratch coat shall
conform to the requirements of PNS 07, Type 1.
2.1.6 Sand for mortar setting beds shall conform to the requirement of PNS 18, Type 1.
2.1.7 Water shall be potable.
3.1 Mixing
Page | 156
Epoxy shall be mixed in the proportions specified by the granite manufacturer.
3.2 Installation of Granite
3.2.1 Preparation of surfaces: Surfaces to receive the granite slab shall be clean, free of dust,
dirt, oil grease, and other deleterious substances before laying of the setting bed.
3.2.2 Setting bed shall be a minimum thickness of 20 mm thick. The grout shall spread until
its surface is true and even thoroughly compacted. A setting bed, as large as can be
covered with granite slab before the grout has reached its initial set, shall be placed in
one operation but in the event that more setting bed has been placed that can be covered,
the unfinished portion shall be removed and cut back on a clean leveled edge.
3.2.3 Laying of Granite Slabs: All exposed edges shall be accurately gauged to a uniform
thickness. Cutting and fitting shall be done in workmanlike manner as required to
accommodate the work of others. Joints between the granite slabs shall show an even
width approximately 2 mm when laid and finished. The method of fully buttering edges
of the granite as it is laid equally approved. Surplus grout shall be cleaned from face of
the granite immediately.
3.3 Finish and Quality

All exposed granite surfaces shall be even level with all edges clean cut sharp. All
exposed granite surfaces shall be polished smooth.
3.4 Protection
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to fully protect the granite from damage by
others before, during and after its installation until the final acceptance of the work.
3.5 Cleaning
Upon completion of various portions of the granite work, the contractor shall remove all
unused surplus materials, rubbish, debris, etc. in connection with this contract and shall
give granite surface a thorough cleaning to the satisfaction and approval of the owner.
No acid or harsh abrasive cleaners or steel wire brushes shall be used. Scrub with fiber
brush and clean water to clean granite.
laid with granite slab and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 157
Granite work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based at
the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

NO.
1018 (3) e 20mm Thk Natural Granite Countertop Slab with 200mm l.m.
H Backsplash & 200mm Skirting (Location: Toilets)
1018 (3) f 20mm Thk Natural Granite Countertop Slab with 200mm l.m.
H Backsplash & 250mm Skirting (Location: Toilets, if
applicable)
1018 (3) h 20mm Thk Natural Granite Countertop Slab with 200mm l.m.
H Backsplash & 60mm Skirting (Location: Pantry/
Kitchen)
1018 (13) Floor Finish: Flamed Granite Tiles, 25mmthk x 600mm x sq.m.
600mm
1018 (15) Base Finish: 25mm Thk x 100mm H Natural Granite Base l.m.
Tile
1018 (16) Natural Granite Flooring, Polished, 600 X 600mm sq.m.
1018 (17) Natural Granite Wall Cladding, Polished, 25mm thk. sq.m.
Page | 158
ITEM 1018 HOMOGENEOUS TILES
1018.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
The work includes the supply and furnishing of materials and performing labor
necessary for the complete installation of all homogeneous tile-work as shown or
indicated in drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals:
1.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of each type of floor and wall tiles including all required beads, molding,
and trim units.
1.3 Delivery and Storage:
1.3.1 Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer’s unopened containers fully
damage.
1.4 Extra Stock
Supply on extra two percent of each type of tile used in clean, marked cartons for
emergency use.
2.1 Materials:
All materials shall be of the best of their respective kinds, in sizes and colors as shown
on the plans, details and finish schedules or otherwise specified herein or as will be
approved by the Architect upon submission of samples. Samples of all tiles shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval before placing orders. All tiles shall be
delivered to the jobsite in unopened grade-sealed containers.
Tile colors and patterns shall be as selected. Colors and patterns by reference to
manufacturer’s name and designations are for color and pattern identification only and
are not intended to limit selection of other manufacture’s products with similar color
and patterns. Size shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Page | 159
2.2 Hydrated Lime
2.3 Sand
2.4 Water
Clean and potable
2.5 Portland Cement
3.1 Installation
Do not start tile work until roughing in for plumbing and electrical work has been
completed and tested. All surfaces to receive tile-work shall be cleaned of loose
materials and given proper surface preparation prior to homogeneous tile-work.
Prepare and install in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and ANSI A108.5.
3.1.1 Application of Scratch Coat:
3.1.1.1 Thoroughly dampen, but not saturate, surfaces of masonry before applying the scratch
coat. Make surface areas appear slightly damp. Allow no free water on the surface.
3.1.1.2 On masonry, first apply a thin coat with great pressure, then bring it out sufficiently to
compensate for the major irregularities on the masonry surfaces to a thickness of not less
than 6 mm at any point.
3.1.1.3 Evenly rake scratch coats, but not dash coats, to provide good mechanical key for
3.1.1.4 On surfaces not sufficiently rough to provide good mechanical key, dash on the first coat
with a whisk by broom or fiber brush using a strong whipping motion. Do not travel or
otherwise disturb mortar applied by dashing until it is hardened.
3.1.2 Floor Tile Installation on Mortar Bed:
3.1.2.1 Before spreading the setting bed, establish lines of borders and center the fieldwork in
both directions to permit the pattern to be laid with a minimum of cut tiles.
Page | 160
3.1.2.2 Clean concrete sub-floor then moisture but not soak. Afterwards sprinkle dry cement over
the surface and spread the mortar on the setting bed.
3.1.2.3 Mix mortar 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand. Tamp to assure good bond over the
entire area and screed to provide a smooth and level bed at proper height and slope.
3.1.2.4 Pitch floor to drains as required.
3.1.2.5 After setting bed has set sufficiently to be worked over sprinkle dry cement over surface
and lay tile.
3.1.2.6 Keep the joints parallel and straight over the entire area by using straight edges.
3.1.2.7 Tamp the tile solidly onto the bed, using wood blocks of size to ensure solid bedding free
from depressions.
3.1.2.8 Lay tiles from center outward and make adjustments at walls.
3.1.3 Wall Tile Installation on Mortar Bed:
3.1.3.1 Before application of mortar bed, dampen the surface of the scratch coat evenly to obtain
uniform section.
3.1.3.2 Use temporary or spot grounds to control the thickness of the mortar bed. Fill out the
3.1.3.3 Apply the mortar bed over an area no greater than can be covered with tile while the coat
is still plastic.
3.1.3.4 Allow no single applications of mortar to 19 mm thick.
3.1.3.5 Completely immerse wall tile in clean water and soak it at least ½ hour. After removal,
stack tile on edge long enough to drain off excess water. Re-soak and drain individual
tiles then dry along edges. Allow no moisture to remain on the back of tile during setting.
3.1.3.6 Apply a bond coat 0.8 mm thick to the plastic setting bed or to the back of each sheet or
tile.
3.1.3.7 Press tile firmly into the bed and beat into place within 1 hour.
3.1.3.8 Lay tile field in rectangular block areas not exceeding 600 mm x 600 mm. cut the setting
bed through its entire depth along the edges of each block area after placement and before
subsequent blocks are installed.
Page | 161
3.1.3.9 Within 1 hour after installation of tile, remove strings from string-set tile and wet the
faces of face-mounted tile and remove the paper and glue. Avoid using excess water.
Adjust any tile that is out of alignment.
3.1.4 Grouting
3.1.4.1 After tile has sufficiently set, force a maximum of grout into joints by trowel, brush or
finger application.
3.1.4.2 Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion-edge tile to the depth of the cushion.
3.1.4.3 Fill all joints of square-edged tile flush with the surface of the tile. Fill all gaps or sips.
3.1.4.4 During grouting clean all excess grout off with clean burlap, other cloth or sponges.
3.2 Cleaning
Sponge and wash tile thoroughly with clean water after the grout has stiffened. Then
clean by rubbing with damp cloth or sponges and polish clean with dry cloth.
3.3 Protection
Cover finished tile floors with clean 13.6 kg. natural kraft paper before permitting foot
traffic. Place board walkways on floors that are to be continuously used as passageways
by workers. Protect tiled corners external angles, with board corner strips in areas used
as passageways by workers.
laid with homogeneous tiles and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Homogeneous tile work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for
Item.
Page | 162

NO.
1018 (8) a Floor Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 600 x sq.m.
600mm
1018 (8) b Floor Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 600 x sq.m.
600mm (Anti- Skid)
1018 (8) b Floor Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 600 x sq.m.
600mm (Anti- Skid)
1018 (8) c Floor Finish: HomogeneousTiles, 10mm Thk x 400 x sq.m.

400mm
1018 (8) d Floor Finish: HomogeneousTiles, 10mm Thk x 400 x sq.m.

400mm (Anti- Skid)
1018 (8) f Floor Finish: HomogeneousTiles, 10mm Thk x 300 x sq.m.

600mm
1018 (8) f.1 Floor Finish: HomogeneousTiles, 10mm Thk x 300 x sq.m.
300mm
1018 (8) g Wall Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 600 x sq.m.
600mm
1018 (8) h Wall Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 300 x sq.m.
300mm
1018 (8) i Wall Finish: Homogeneous Tiles, 10mm Thk x 400 x sq.m.
400mm
Page | 163
ITEM 1020 LAMINATED WOOD STRIP FLOORING
1020.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of laminated
wood strip flooring as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for laminated wood strip flooring.
1.2.2 Samples: Two samples of each type of laminated wood strip flooring.
Materials shall be delivered to the site in original unopened packages, bundles or

containers and with all labels intact. Flooring shall be stored in fully covered, well
ventilated areas and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity.
Flooring shall be maintained at an average moisture content of 6 to 9 percent.
Temperature and humidity in the storage area shall closely approximate the temperature
and humidity of the rooms in which the flooring is to be installed.
Rooms where laminated wood flooring is to be installed shall have permanent heating
and air conditioning installed and working or adequate arrangements for ventilation
and temperature controls. The temperature shall be maintained at 14 to 27 degrees C
and the humidity shall be maintained as recommended by the manufacturer starting not
less than three (3) days prior to beginning the installation of flooring and continuing
throughout the remainder of the contract period.
1.5 Scheduling
Laminated wood strip flooring work shall be scheduled after any other work which
would raise the moisture content of the flooring or damage the finished surface of the
flooring.
2.1 Laminated Wood Strip Floor
Page | 164
2.1.1 Laminated wood strip flooring shall be 10 mm thick laminated wood strip floor with
laminate thickness of 0.2 mm, premium wood material, glue less click joint and
provided with underlayment.
2.2 Wall Base
2.2.1 Baseboard: Shall be from 25 mm x 100 mm high painted kiln dry wood base.
3.1 Surface Conditions
Concrete slab shall be level, steel troweled to a tolerance of 3 mm plus or minus in a 3

meters 10 foot radius. Slab surface shall be clean, dry, and approved prior to start of
installation. The slab shall be depressed as required by the floor specified.
3.2 Installation
Allow unopened cartons of planks to remain in the room where they are to be installed
at least 48 hours (96 hours in drier or very humid climates) prior to installation.
Subfloor must be clean, dry and level. Any spots lower than 3⁄16 of an inch must be
filled in with a portland cement-based leveling compound and any ridges must be
removed. For flooring installed on all concrete subfloors that emit a water vapor no
greater than 5lbs/1000sq. ft./24 hrs, including those covered by tile, vinyl, linoleum or
sheet flooring, you must use a non-recycled (100% virgin) resin 6-mil (0.15mm) with
a density of 0.92lbs/cubic ft. and a thickness tolerance of +/–10% polyethylene film as
a vapor barrier. A polyethylene film vapor barrier must not be used over wood
subfloors. Foam underlayment must have consistent density (+/–25%) and thickness
(+/–15%). Glue can only be used with specific flooring that has instructions for
applying glue to flooring joints. Glue must meet or exceed water resistant PVA glue
capable of achieving an ultimate strength of 4000 psi. Use installation spacers between
the planks and the wall, or any other fixed object, i.e. island counters, to allow for the
required 1⁄4 inch expansion space (2 spacers placed together, thick side to thin side,
equal 1⁄4 inch). You will need approximately one spacer per square foot of installation
area.
3.3 Protection
From the time of installation until final acceptance, flooring shall be protected from
damage.
installed with laminated wood strip flooring and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Page | 165
Laminated wood strip flooring work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities

NO.
1020 (1) d Laminated Floating Wood Flooring sq.m.
Page | 166
ITEM 1020 PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERING
1020.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of plastic
laminate covering as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
1.2.1 BS EN Publications
a. BS 4965 : 199 Annex A – Determination of Irregularities

b. BS EN 438 – 2 – Resistance to Immersion in Boiling Water
c. BS EN 438 – 2 – Determination of Thickness and Density (by weight
and calculation
d. BS EN 438 – 2 – Resistance to Water Vapor
e. BS EN ISO 178 – Flexural Properties
f. BS EN 438 – 2 –Resistance to Impact by Large Diameter Ball (diameter
43 mm, 325g)
g. BS 6853: 1999 Annex B – Toxicity Emission
1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications
a. ASTM D 3363 – Pencil Hardness

b. ASTM G 154 – Resistance to QUV Accelerated Weathering for 168 hours
c. ASTM D 4060 (CS 10, 500g for 1000 cycles) – Abrasion Resistance
d. ASTM D 4541 – Adhesion Bond Strength
1.2.3 JIS Publication
a. JIS K 6902 – Heat Resistance
1.2.4 EN Publication
a. EN 13501 – 1:2007 + A1: 2009 – Smoke Density
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Samples
Page | 167
a. One sample of each type, texture, and color required. Samples shall be of
sufficient to show complete texture.
b. Aluminum joiner: One 305 mm long piece of each type used.
c. Adhesive
1.3.2 Manufacturer's Literature and Data
a. Plastic laminate covering
b. Aluminum joiner
c. Adhesive
d. Installation instructions
e. Maintenance instructions, including recommended materials and methods for

maintaining plastic laminate wall and ceiling covering with precautions in use
of cleaning material.
Deliver the material to the site in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages and
clearly labeled information. Store the material in a safe, dry, clean, and well-ventilated
area at temperatures not less than 10 degrees C and within a relative humidity range from
30 to 60 percent. Store all materials in a flat position and protect from damage, soiling,
and moisture. Do not open containers until needed for installation, unless verification
inspection is required.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Plastic Laminate Covering: Shall be constructed of 3 mm thick high pressure solid
compact laminate mounted on 12 mm thick marine plywood.
2.1.2 Adhesive: Shall be mildew resistant, non-staining to the wearing surface, and of the type
supplied or recommended by the plastic laminate wall and ceiling covering
Manufacturer.
2.1.3 Joiner: Shall be aluminum.
Page | 168
3.1 Field Conditions
3.1.1 Temperatures: Do not perform work until surfaces and materials have been maintained
at minimum of 15 C. for three days before work begins. Maintain minimum
temperatures of 15 C. until adhesives are dried or cured.
3.1.2 Lighting: Do not proceed unless a minimum lighting level of 15 candlepower per
square foot occurs. Measure light level at mid-height of wall
3.1.3 Ventilation: Provide uniform continuous ventilation in space. Ventilate for a time for
not less than complete drying or curing of adhesive.
3.1.4 Protect other surfaces from damage which may be caused by this work.
3.1.5 Remove waste from building daily.
3.2 Application of Adhesive
Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Prevent

adhesive from getting on face of wall covering. Apply adhesive to wall covering back.
3.3 Wall and Ceiling Covering Installation
The substrate and conditions use wall covering of same batch or run in an area.
Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacture’s written instructions.
a. Install material together with aluminum joiner completely adhered, smooth,

and clean, without wrinkles, air pockets, gaps or overlaps.
b. Extend plastic laminate covering continuous behind non-built-in casework and

other items which are close to but not bolted to or touching the walls.
c. Install plastic laminate covering before installation of resilient base. Extend

wall covering not more than 6 mm below top of resilient base.
d. Install panels consecutively in order in which they are cut from the roll
including filling spaces above or below windows, doors, or similar
penetrations.
3.4 Cleaning and Installing Temporary Removed Items
a. Remove adhesive from wall covering as work proceeds.
Page | 169
b. Remove adhesives where spilled, splashed or splattered on wall and ceiling

coverings or adjacent surfaces in a manner not to damage surface from which
it is removed.
c. Reinstall previously removed electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical

diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings.
All works performed under this section shall be measured in square meters for areas
actually installed with plastic laminate covering and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Plastic laminate covering work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall
be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
Page | 170
ITEM 1020 RESILIENT FLOORING – VINYL TILES
1020.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of resilient
flooring – vinyl tiles as shown on the drawings and finish schedule and as specified
herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Catalog Data: Complete descriptive literature for each type of the following items:
a. Floor tile
b. Wall base
Clearly mark data to indicate which type, size, model or item will be provided. Data
shall be sufficient to show conformance to specified requirements.
1.2.2 Manufacturer's Installation Procedures: Submit four (4) current copies of the flooring
manufacturer's recommended standard installation procedure for each type of flooring
material.
1.2.3 Colors and Patterns: One (1) sample of each color and pattern of each of the following
items:
a. Floor tile
b. Wall base
Where colors and patterns are not indicated, submit not less than 12 different samples of
manufacturer's standard colors and patterns for selection by the Architect and/or Owner.
1.2.4 Manufacturer's Maintenance Data and Instructions: Upon completion and prior to
acceptance of the work, submit current copies in triplicate of the flooring Manufacturer's
printed recommendations for maintenance methods and products for each type of
flooring material.
Deliver materials to the job in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with the
brands, names, and production runs clearly marked thereon. Handle materials carefully
and store them in their original containers at not less than 21 degrees C for at least 48
hours before work is started. Do not open containers until inspected and accepted.
Page | 171
Maintain spaces in which flooring work is to be performed at not less than 18 degrees C
at the floor level for at least 48 hours prior to starting the work, during the time work is
performed, and for at least 48 hours after the work is completed. Maintain a minimum
temperature of 12 degrees C thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to remove moisture
and fumes from the area.
2.1 Materials
Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and standards and to the
requirements specified herein.
2.1.1 Color and Pattern: The color and pattern of tile shall be uniformly distributed throughout
the thickness of the tile. Resilient flooring materials of the same type, pattern, and color
shall be of the same production run and shall be so marked. Variations in shades and off-
pattern matches between containers will not be acceptable. Flooring in any one
continuous area or that used in replacement of damaged flooring in a continuous area
shall be from the same lot and have the same shade and pattern.
2.1.2 Vinyl Composition Tile
2.1.2.1 Floor Tile: Shall be 3 mm min. thickness, 300 mm by 300 mm asbestos free vinyl
composition tile similar to “Armstrong” or “Azrock” or approved equal. Color shall
be as selected by the Architect and/or Owner.
2.1.2.2 Wall Base: Provide 3 mm minimum thickness Cove Vinyl wall base adjacent to resilient
flooring. Base shall be 100 mm high. Color shall be as selected by the Architect and/or
owner. Use flexible base to conform to irregularities in walls, partitions, and floors.
Provide pre-molded corners in matching size, shape and color for all right-angle inside
and outside corners with 3 mm thick base.
2.1.2.2 Adhesives: All adhesives used for installation of flooring materials including field area,
integral cove, end cuts, and cross seams, and shall be as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer to suit the grade level and sub-floor conditions.
2.1.2.3 Leveling compounds, underlayment, and patching compounds: As recommended

or approved by flooring manufacturer.
2.1.2.4 Accessories: Shall be standard products of the flooring manufacturer.
Page | 172
3.1 Condition of Surfaces
The flooring shall not be installed on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent a proper
installation. Floor surfaces that are to receive flooring shall be clean, thoroughly dry,
smooth, firm and sound, and free from oil, paint, wax, dirt, and any other damaging
material.
3.1.1 Preparation of Concrete Floor Surfaces: Grind all ridges and other uneven surfaces
smooth. Concrete curing compounds, other than the type that does not adversely affect
adhesive, shall be entirely removed from the slabs. Cut out and fill cracks with 1.5 mm
wide and wider with crack filler as specified for this application. Provide latex
underlayment to fill the remaining holes, cracks, and depressions, and for smoothing,
leveling, and feather edging the concrete. Remove loose particles, vacuum chalky, dusty
surfaces and prime the cleaned surfaces if recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
3.1.2 Moisture Test for Concrete Floors: As recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.
3.2 Application
Install flooring after work of other trades that might damage flooring has been completed.
Apply flooring and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
procedure. Work shall be performed by workmen experienced in the application of such
flooring. Detailed requirements are as follows:
3.2.1 Adhesives: Apply adhesives in accordance with the adhesive manufacture’s printed
directions, unless specified or directed otherwise. Smoking, the use of open flames and
other immediate sources of ignition are strictly prohibited in the area where solvent-
containing adhesives are being used or spread. Post conspicuous signs reading “NO
SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME” in the area of spread adhesive.
3.2.2 Flooring: Apply tile flooring in the patterns indicated. Start in the center of the room or
area, and work from the center towards the edges. Keep tile line and Joint Square,
symmetrical, tight, and vent; and keep each floor in true, level plans, except where
indicated as sloped. Vary edge width as necessary to maintain full-size tiles in the field
but no edge tile shall be less than one-half (1/2) the field tile size, except where irregular
shaped rooms make it impossible.
3.2.3 Cutting: Cut flooring to and fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and
cabinets, pipes ad outlets. Cut edges, fit, and scribed to walls and partitions after field
flooring has been applied.
3.2.4 Edge Strips: Provide edging strips where flooring terminates at points higher than the
contiguous finished flooring, except at doorways where the thresholds are provided.
Secure plastic strips with adhesives.
3.2.5 Application of Vinyl-Composition Tile: Prime concrete slabs in contact with the ground
Page | 173
with cut-back type primer if recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Work primer
with a non-absorptive base completely into the surface. Allow primer to become roughly
dry before applying adhesive. Apply only cut-back adhesive to primed concrete
surfaces.
3.2.6 Application of Vinyl Wall Base: Apply wall base after flooring has been completed, and
the wall surface to which the base is to be applied is thoroughly dry. Form inside and
outside corners with base materials as specified herein.
3.3 Cleaning and Protection
3.3.1 Remove all excessive adhesives from the surface of the flooring and the cove.
3.3.2 Perform initial maintenance on the completed installation as recommended by the

flooring manufacturer.
3.3.3 Protect the flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer from damage by other
trades and by the placement of fixtures and furnishings.
installed with resilient flooring and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Resilient flooring – vinyl tiles work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities

NO.
1020 (1) a Vinyl Tiles, 300mm x 300mm sq.m.
1020 (1) b 100mm H Vinyl Cove Base l.m.
Page | 174
ITEM 1020 SPECIALTY TILE-ANTI STATIC VINYL TILES
1020.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of specialty tile-anti
static vinyl tiles as shown on the drawings and finish schedule and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Catalog Data: Complete descriptive literature.
1.2.2 Manufacturer's Installation Procedures: Submit four (4) current copies of the flooring
manufacturer's recommended standard installation procedure for flooring material.
1.2.3 Colors and Patterns: One (1) sample of each color and pattern.
Where colors and patterns are not indicated, submit not less than 12 different samples of
manufacturer's standard colors and patterns for selection by the Architect and/or Owner.
1.2.4 Manufacturer's Maintenance Data and Instructions: Upon completion and prior to
acceptance of the work, submit current copies in triplicate of the flooring manufacturer's
printed recommendations for maintenance methods and products for each type of
flooring material.
Deliver materials to the job in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with the
brands, names, and production runs clearly marked thereon. Handle materials carefully
and store them in their original containers at not less than 21 degrees C for at least 48
hours before work is started. Do not open containers until inspected and accepted.
Maintain spaces in which flooring work is to be performed at not less than 18 degrees C
at the floor level for at least 48 hours prior to starting the work, during the time work is
performed, and for at least 48 hours after the work is completed. Maintain a minimum
temperature of 12 degrees C thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to remove moisture
and fumes from the area.
2.2 Materials
Page | 175
2.3 Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and standards and to the
2.1.3 Color and Pattern: The color and pattern of tile shall be uniformly distributed throughout
the thickness of the tile. Resilient flooring materials of the same type, pattern, and color
shall be of the same production run and shall be so marked. Variations in shades and off-
pattern matches between containers will not be acceptable. Flooring in any one
continuous area or that used in replacement of damaged flooring in a continuous area
shall be from the same lot and have the same shade and pattern.
2.1.4 Antistatic Vinyl Composition Floor Tile:
2.1.4.1 Antistatic Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Shall be 3 mm min. thickness, 600 mm by
600 mm nominal size antistatic vinyl composition tile similar to “Toli” or approved
equal. Tile shall be of solid material and shall be manufactured from the highest grade
materials with the surface smooth and free from foreign matter. Tile shall be micro-
squared edge to insure tight joints. Color shall be as selected by the Architect and/or
Owner.
2.1.2.2 Wall Base: Provide 3 mm min. thickness cove vinyl wall base adjacent to resilient
flooring. Base shall be 100 mm high. Color shall be as selected by the Architect and/or
owner. Use flexible base to conform to irregularities in walls, partitions, and floors.
Provide pre-molded corners in matching size, shape and color for all right-angle inside
and outside corners with 3 mm thick base.
2.1.2.3 Antistatic Property in accordance with JIS A 1454.
2.1.2.4 Antistatic Property to human bodies in accordance with JIS A 1021-16 (2007).
2.1.2.5 Accessories: Standard products of the antistatic vinyl tile manufacturer.
2.1.2.6 Adhesives: Special type antistatic tile adhesives as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.1 Conditions of Surfaces
The flooring shall not be installed on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent a proper
installation. Floor surfaces that are to receive flooring shall be level, clean, thoroughly
dry, smooth, firm and sound, and free from oil, paint, wax, dirt, and any other damaging
material.
3.1.1 Preparation of Concrete Floor Surfaces: Grind all ridges and other uneven surfaces
smooth. Remove loose particles, vacuum chalky, dusty surfaces and prime the cleaned
surfaces as recommended by the antistatic tile manufacturer.
Page | 176
3.1.2 Moisture Test for Concrete Floors: As recommended by the antistatic tile manufacturer.
3.2 Application
Install flooring after work of other trades that might damage flooring has been completed.
Apply flooring and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
procedure. Work shall be performed by workmen experienced in the application of such
flooring. Detailed requirements are as follows:
3.2.1 Adhesives: Apply adhesives in accordance with the adhesive manufacture’s printed
directions, unless specified or directed otherwise. Smoking, the use of open flames and
other immediate sources of ignition are strictly prohibited in the area where solvent-
containing adhesives are being used or spread. Post conspicuous signs reading “NO
SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME” in the area of spread adhesive.
3.2.2 Flooring: Apply tile flooring in the patterns indicated. Start in the center of the room or
area, and work from the center towards the edges. Keep tile line and Joint Square,
symmetrical, tight, and vent; and keep each floor in true, level plans, except where
indicated as sloped. Vary edge width as necessary to maintain full-size tiles in the field
but no edge tile shall be less than one-half (1/2) the field tile size, except where irregular
shaped rooms make it impossible.
3.2.3 Cutting: Cut flooring to and fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and
cabinets, pipes ad outlets. Cut edges, fit, and scribed to walls and partitions after field
flooring has been applied.
3.2.4 Edge Strips: Provide edging strips where flooring terminates at points higher than the
contiguous finished flooring, except at doorways where the thresholds are provided.
Secure plastic strips with adhesives.
3.2.5 Application of Vinyl Wall Base: Apply wall base after flooring has been completed, and
the wall surface to which the base is to be applied is thoroughly dry. Form inside and
outside corners with base materials as specified herein.
3.3 Cleaning and Protection
3.3.1 Remove all excessive adhesives from the surface of the flooring and the cove.
3.3.2 Perform initial maintenance on the completed installation as recommended by the

flooring manufacturer.
3.3.3 Protect the flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer from damage by other
trades and by the placement of fixtures and furnishings.
Page | 177
installed with specialty tile-antistatic vinyl tiles and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Specialty tile-anti static vinyl tile work is determined and provided in the Bill of

NO.
1020 (1) g Anti Static Vinyl Tiles, 600 x 600mm sq.m.
Page | 178
ITEM 1020 VINYL COATED WALL COVERING
1020.1 DESCRIPTION
1.3 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of vinyl coated
wall covering as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
1.2.1 Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc., (CFFA): Document No. 6 Vinyl
Coated Fabric Wall covering.
1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
G21-96 Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Samples
a. One sample of each type, pattern, and color required. Samples shall be of
sufficient to show complete pattern.
b. Cap molding: One 305 mm long piece of each type used.
c. Corner guard: One 305 mm long piece.
1.3.2 Manufacturer's Certificates: Wall covering manufacturer's approval of adhesive.
1.5.2 Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
a. Primer and adhesive.
b. Installation instructions.
c. Maintenance instructions, including recommended materials and methods for

maintaining wall covering with precautions in use of cleaning material.
Page | 179
Deliver the material to the site in manufacturer’s original wrappings and packages and
clearly labeled information. Store the material in a safe, dry, clean, and well-ventilated
area at temperatures not less than 10 degrees C and within a relative humidity range from
30 to 60 percent. Store all covering material in a flat position and protect from damage,
soiling, and moisture. Do not open containers until needed for installation, unless
verification inspection is required.
2.1 Vinyl Coated Fabric Wall Covering
a. Wall covering: Medium Duty

b. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21, rating of 0.
c. Factory-applied clear de-lustered polyvinyl-fluoride (PVF) coating:
- Minimum 0.0125 mm (1/2 mils) thickness.

- Do not include PVF coating weight in minimum total coating weight.
- Fire hazard classification with PVF coating: Class A unless specified
otherwise.
d. Primer, Sealer and Adhesive: Shall be mildew resistant, non-staining to the

wearing surface, and of the type supplied or recommended by the wall covering
Manufacturer.
e. Cap Molding: As indicated.
f. Corner Guard: Shall be clear acrylic plastic angle with 29 mm legs, 1.2 long
surfaces mounted.
3.1 Field Conditions
3.1.1 Temperatures: Do not perform work until surfaces and materials have been maintained
at minimum of 15 C. for three days before work begins. Maintain minimum
temperatures of 15 C. until adhesives are dried or cured.
3.1.2 Lighting: Do not proceed unless a minimum lighting level of 15 candlepower per
square foot occurs. Measure light level at mid-height of wall
3.1.3 Ventilation: Provide uniform continuous ventilation in space. Ventilate for a time for
not less than complete drying or curing of adhesive.
3.1.4 Protect other surfaces from damage which may be caused by this work.
3.1.5 Remove waste from building daily.
Page | 180
3.2 Surface Condition and Preparation
Inspect surfaces to receive wall coverings to assure that; patches and repairs are
completed, surfaces are clean, smooth and prime painted. Do not proceed until
discovered defects have been corrected by other trades and surfaces are ready to receive
wall covering. Carefully remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical
diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to
starting work. Keep and store items carefully prior to reinstallation. Fill cracks,
crevices and holes with compound recommended by the wall covering manufacturers.
Sand rough spots smooth and remove residual powder using a damp cloth. Surfaces to
be covered shall be thoroughly dry. Prime and seal surfaces to be covered with vinyl
coated wall covering in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3.3 Application of Adhesive
Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Prevent

adhesive from getting on face of wall covering. Apply adhesive to wall covering back.
3.4 Wall Covering Installation
The substrate and conditions use wall covering of same batch or run in an area. Use
fabric rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacturer.
a. Install material completely adhered, smooth, and clean, without wrinkles, air
pockets, gaps or overlaps.
b. Extend wall covering continuous behind non-built-in casework and other items
which are close to but not bolted to or touching the walls.
c. Install wall covering before installation of resilient base. Extend wall covering
not more than 6 mm below top of resilient base.
d. Install panels consecutively in order in which they are cut from the roll
including filling spaces above or below windows, doors, or similar
penetrations.
e. Do not install horizontal seams.
f. Except on match patterns, hang fabric by reversing alternate strips, except as
recommended by the Manufacturer.
g. Cutting:
1. Cut on a work table with a straight edge.

2. Joints or seams that are not cut clean are unacceptable.
3. Trim additional selvage to achieve a color and pattern match at seams.
4. Do not double cut seams on wall unless specified.
5. If double cutting on the wall is necessary, place a three inch strip of
Type I wall covering under pasted edge.
a. Do not cut into wall surface.
Page | 181
b. After cutting, remove strip and excess adhesive from seam

before proceeding to next seam.
c. Smooth down seam in adhesive for tight bond and joint.
h. Trim strip-matched patterns, which are not factory pre-trimmed.

i. Inside Corners:
1. Wrap wall covering around corner.

2. Do not seam within 50 mm of inside corners.
3. Double cut seam.
j. Outside Corners:
1. Wrap wall covering around corner.

2. Do not seam within 150 mm of outside corners.
3. Double cut seam.
3.5 Patching
a. Replace surface damaged wall covering in a space as specified for new work.
1. Replace full height of surface.

2. Replace from break in plane to break in plane when same batch or run
is not used. Double cut seams.
3. Adjoining differential colors from separate batches or runs are not
acceptable.
b. Correct loose or raised seams with adhesives to lay flat with tight bonded joint
as specified for new work.
3.6 Cleaning and Installing Temporary Removed Items
a. Remove adhesive from wall covering as work proceeds.

b. Remove adhesives where spilled, splashed or splattered on wall coverings or
adjacent surfaces in a manner not to damage surface from which it is removed.
c. Reinstall previously removed electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical
diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings.
installed with vinyl coated wall covering and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 182
Vinyl coated wall covering work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities

NO.
1020 (1) e Vinyl Coated Wall Covering sq.m.
Page | 183
ITEM 1021 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
1021.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of concrete floor
topping as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Failure of concrete topping to bond to substrate (as evidenced by hollow sound when
tapped), or disintegration or other failure of topping to perform as a floor finish, will be
considered failure of materials and workmanship. Repair or replace toppings in areas of
such failure, as directed.
Deliver materials in the manufacturers' original unbroken packages or containers that are
labeled plainly with the manufacturers' names and brands. Keep materials dry and stored
off the ground, under cover, and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces until
ready to be used.
1.4.1 Concrete Floor Topping: Maintain an ambient temperature of not less than 27 degrees C
continuously where work will be done. Maintain this temperature for not less than 48
hours prior to the application of colored cement and during the curing operation.
1.4.2 Protection from Sun and Dry Winds: During the application of the finish surface, and
for a period of 48 hours following the completion of finish surface application for any
given area, the surface finish shall be protected from direct sunlight and direct winds.
Use of tarpaulins or other temporary means of protection cover may be acceptable.
1021.2 MATERIAL DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 Cement and Aggregates
2.1.1 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, Grey Cement
2.1.2 Standard Aggregate: ASTM C 33, and as follows:

2.1.2.1 Fine aggregate, consisting of sand or crushed stone screenings, clean, hard, free from
deleterious matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 9.53mm (3/8”) - 100 percent
Page | 184
b. No. 4 - 95-100 percent

c. No. 8 - 80-90 percent
d. No. 16 - 50-75 percent
e. No. 30 - 30-50 percent
f. No. 50 - 10-20 percent
g. No. 100 - 2-5 percent
2.1.2.2 Coarseaggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone, clean, hard, free from deleterious
matter. Grade by weight to pass sieves as follows:
a. 12.7mm (1/2”) - 100 percent

b. 9.53mm (3/8”) - 30-50 percent
c. No. 4 - 0-15percent
d. No. 8 - 0-5 percent
2.1.3 Reinforcement: ASTM A 185 welded steel wire fabric. Provide for all concrete topping
50mm thick and above.
2.1.3.1 All concrete toppings shall not be less than 50mm thick in any application/location.
2.1.3.2 Use WWF 4 x 4 – W1.4 x W1.4
2.1.4 Miscellaneous Materials:
2.1.4.1 Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two – component material suitable for use on dry or
damp surfaces. Provide material “Type,” “Grade” and “Class” to suit project
requirements.
2.2 Topping Mix
2.2.1 Standard Topping:
2.2.1.1 Design mix to produce topping material with the following characteristics:
a. Compressive strength of concrete protection course: 20684.16 kPa

(3000psi).
2.3 Mixing
2.3.1 Provide batch type mechanical mixer for mixing topping material at project site. Equip
batch with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank, and a water measuring device.
Use only mixers which are capable of mixing aggregates, cement, and water into a
uniform mix within specified time, and of discharging mix without segregation.
Page | 185
2.3.2 Mix each batch of 1.5 cubic meters or less for at least 1-1/2 minutes after ingredients are
in mixer, increase mixing time fifteen (15) seconds for each additional cubic meter of
fraction thereof.
3.1 Conditions of Surfaces
3.1.1 Topping Applied to Hardened Concrete: Remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, paint,
or other contaminants, leaving a clean surface.
3.1.2 When base slab surface is unacceptable for good bonding, roughen surface by chipping
or scarifying before cleaning.
3.1.3 Prior to placing topping mixture, thoroughly dampen slab surface but do not leave
standing water. Over dampened surface, apply specified epoxy adhesive. Place topping
mix while epoxy adhesive is still tacky.
3.1.4 For reinforced toppings, provide necessary chairs or supports, and maintain position of
reinforcing mesh as shown on the drawings.
3.1.4.1 Joints: Mark locations of joints in base slab so that joints in top course will be placed
directly over them.
3.2 Placing and Compacting
3.2.1 Float Finish: Spread topping mixture evenly over prepared base to the required elevation
and strike – off. Use highway straightedge, ball float, or darby to level surface. After the
topping has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation, and water sheen has
disappeared, float the surface at least twice to a uniform sandy texture. Re straightens
where necessary with highway straightedge. Uniformly slope surface to drains.
3.2.2 Where joints are required, construct to match and coincide with joints in base slab.
Provide other joints as shown.
3.3 Trowel Finish
3.3.1 After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power driven towels. Continue
trowel ling until surface is ready to receive the final trowel ling. Begin final trowel ling
when a ringing sound is produced as trowel moved over surface.
3.3.2 Continue final trowel operation to produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform
in texture and appearance.
3.4 Curing and Protection
Page | 186
3.4.2 General: Protect freshly placed topping from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
3.4.2 Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to topping surfaces in hot, dry, or
windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer’swritten instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying
topping, but before float finishing.
3.4.3 Begincuring immediately after finishing topping.Cure by one (1) or a combination of the
following methods, according to topping manufacturer’s written instructions:
a. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with water. Cover topping surfaces and edges with 300mm lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
b. Moisture – Retaining – Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 300mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven (7) days. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material or waterproof tape.
3.5 Patching and Pointing
3.5.1 Upon completion of the work, cut out and patch loose, cracked, damaged, or defective
concrete. Patching shall match existing work in texture and shall be finished flush with
concrete previously applied. Do pointing and patching work abutting or adjoining any
other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner.
installed concrete floor topping and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Concrete floor topping work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
this Item.
Page | 187

NO.
1021 (14) b 50mm thk. Concrete Topping with Wiremesh sq.m.

Reinforcement
1021 (14) b.1 50mm thk. Concrete Topping sq.m.
Page | 188
ITEM 1021 NON-METALLIC FLOOR HARDENER
1021.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of non-metallic
floor hardener as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including basic materials
analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified.
1.2.2 Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
Deliver hardener in bags or bulks for the building site with the label intact and seals
unbroken, subject to inspection by the Owner’s Representative before being opened.
2.1 Materials
Provide materials conforming to specifications and the requirement as specified.
2.1.1 Non-metallic floor hardener: Shall be high abrasion resistant, permanent coloring
media, dispersing agents and binding elements and formulated to comply with Federal
Job Specification for “Emery Slip-Resistant finish” with a distinct advantage in
performing the dual function of a hardener and a slip resistant aggregate. Material shall
be similar to “Florgard Non-metallic Aggregate Colored Hardener” by Rebtrade
International Corp. or approved equal.
2.1.2 Hardener finish color shall be as selected by the Owner and/or Architect.
3.1 Application
3.1.1 The volume of non-metallic hardener to be used will depend upon the service
requirement of the floor. Following the leveling of concrete slab and after bleed water
disappears, dust over the floor of non-metallic hardener as instructed by floor hardener
manufacturer. It should be applied in 2 or 3 shakes floated after each application and
Page | 189
troweled only after final floating. Float thoroughly into the surface and follow with
steel trowelling. As soon as floor has attained its initial set, apply curing compound or
water. Cured floors will be ready for light traffic after 7 days and 23 days for heavy
traffic.
installed with non metallic floor hardener and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Non-metallic floor hardener determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
this Item.

NO.
1021 (13) b Non Metallic Floor Hardener sq.m.
Page | 190
ITEM 1021 PLAIN CEMENT FLOORING STRAIGHT TO FINISH
1021.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of plain cement
flooring straight to finish as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 General Requirements
Plain cement as included herein shall be applied straight to finish as specified hereinafter
to areas indicated on the drawings.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:
a. Bonding compounds, including application instructions.
b. Admixtures, including mixing and application instructions.
1.3.2 Samples: Applied plain cement finish on concrete substrate.
Deliver manufactured materials in the manufacturers' original unbroken packages or

containers that are labeled plainly with the manufacturers' names and brands. Keep
cementitious materials dry and stored off the ground, under cover, and away from
sweating walls and other damp surfaces until ready to be used.
1.5.1 Plain Cement Flooring
Maintain an ambient temperature of not less than 27 degrees C continuously where

plastering work will be done. Maintain this temperature for not less than 48 hours prior
to the application of plain cement and during the curing operation.
1.5.2 Protection from Sun and Dry Winds
During the application of the finish surface, and for a period of 48 hours following the
completion of finish surface application for any given area, the surface finish shall be
protected from direct sunlight and direct winds. Use of tarpaulins or other temporary
means may be acceptable.
Page | 191
2.1 Materials
Plain cement finish is a final topping of portland cement used to resurface newly poured
concrete surfaces. Plain cement is fast resurfacing materials which can be applied as
troweled smooth and sanded.
Provide materials conforming to specifications and the requirements specified.
2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, gray Portland cement Type I.
3.1 Plain Cement Finish Application Procedure
Plain cement finish shall be applied in accordance with the following procedures:
Step1. Concrete is poured to desired level and troweled to smooth finish.
Step2. Two (2) coats of plain cement is applied and troweled to smooth finish.
Step3. After 24 hours of curing, the surface is washed with water and detergent and left
to dry completely for few hours.
Step4. The final result shall be a long lasting smooth surface and ready to
walk-through overnight. However, complete concrete curing shall be
strictly followed to avoid damage.
Upon completion of the work, cut out and patch loose, cracked, damaged, or defective
concrete. Patching shall match existing work in texture and shall be finished flush with
concrete previously applied. Do pointing and patching work abutting or adjoining any
other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner.
All plain cement finish flooring shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for
work actually completed and accepted.
Page | 192
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation including labor,
materials, tools and equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

NO.
1021 (1) a Cement Floor Finish, Plain sq.m.
Page | 193
ITEM 1027 PLASTERING
1027.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of plastering
work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Portland-cement plaster as included herein shall be applied as specified hereinafter to

those areas indicated in the finish schedule. Plaster may be applied directly to interior
masonry walls.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Literature and Data
a. Bonding compounds, including application instructions.
b. Admixtures, including mixing and application instructions.
1.3.2 Samples
a. Metal corner reinforcements
b. Corner beads
c. Casing beads
d. Curved casing beads
e. Control joints
f. Thickness control gauge
g. PVC plasters groove trim
Deliver manufactured materials in the manufacturers' original unbroken packages or

containers that are labeled plainly with the manufacturers' names and brands. Keep
Page | 194
cementitious materials dry and stored off the ground, under cover, and away from
sweating walls and other damp surfaces until ready to be used.
1.5.1 Portland Cement Plaster
Maintain an ambient temperature of not less than 27 degrees C continuously where

plastering work will be done. Maintain this temperature for not less than 48 hours
prior to the application of plaster while the plastering is being done and during the
curing operation.
1.5.2 Protection from Sun and Dry Winds
During the application of the finish coat, and for a period of 48 hours following the
completion of finish coat application for any given area, the surface of the plaster shall
be protected from direct sunlight and direct winds. Use of tarpaulins or other
temporary means may be acceptable. Moist curing shall be provided in accordance
with paragraph entitled, Portland Cement-Lime Plaster.
2.1 Materials
Provide materials conforming to specifications and the requirements specified.
2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C 150, gray Portland cement Type I.
2.1.2 Hydrated Lime
ASTM C206, Type S
2.1.3 Aggregates
Sand for Portland Cement Lime Plaster shall be ASTM C 144, except gradation of
sand shall conform to the following requirements.
2.1.3.1 Sand Gradation for Basecoats:
Percentage Retained by weight (plus or minus 2 percent) on each sieve
Page | 195
Sieve Min Max
No. 4 0
No. 8 0 10
No. 16 10 40
No. 30 30 65
No. 50 70 90
No. 100 95 100
2.1.3.2 Sand for Finish Coats
Sand for finish coat shall be near white and shall be graded within the limits shown
above for basecoats, except that the sand shall pass the No. 8 sieve, and for smooth
finish the sand shall pass the No. 30 sieve.
2.1.3.3 Water
Water shall be clean, fresh, suitable for domestic consumption, and free of mineral
and organic substances that affect the hardening or durability of the plaster.
2.2 Miscellaneous Materials
2.2.1 Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932, Acrylic bonding agent as manufactured and as
recommended by manufacturer.
2.2.2 Admixture: Acrylic polymer additive as manufactured and as recommended

by manufacturer.
2.2.3 Sealers: UV resistant, high vapor permeability, non-staining, non-yellowing, clear

water repellent sealer.
2.3 Accessories
2.3.1 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) groove liner, 15 mm wide by 8 mm depth painted finish or
as indicated on the drawings.
2.3.2 Manufacturer’s suggested steel products, unless otherwise indicated as zinc

alloy. Hot dip galvanized finish, per ASTM A653, G90.
2.3.3 Corner Beads: 3mm diameter with expanded flanges
2.3.4 Casing Beads: Expanded flange, J-shaped, square edge style, to suit application.
2.3.5 Bull Nose Corner Bead: 20mm radius with expanded flanges.
Page | 196
2.3.6 Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
a. Material: Zinc
b. One-piece Type: Folded pair of non-perforated screeds in M-shaped

configuration, with expanded flanges
2.3.7 Expansion Joints: Adjustable expansion joint, free floating with adjustments from
6mm to 16mm.
2.4 Proportioning and Mixing
Except where specified otherwise, materials are specified on a volume basis and shall
be measured in approved containers, which will ensure that the specified proportions
will be controlled and accurately maintained during the progress of the work.
Measuring materials with shovels "shovel count" will not be permitted. Ready-mix
plasters shall be prepared for use by the addition of water only.
2.4.1 Basecoat Proportions:
2.4.1.1 Portland Cement-Lime Plaster Basecoats
Mix scratch coat in the proportion of one part by volume of Portland cement to not
more than 3/4 part by volume of hydrated lime and not less than 2-1/2 nor more than
4 parts by volume of damp loose sand. Mix brown coat in the proportion of one part
by volume of Portland cement to not more than 1/2 part by volume hydrated lime and
not less than 3 nor more than 5 parts by volume of damp loose sand. Workability
shall govern the actual amount of lime and sand used in the scratch and brown coats.
2.4.2 Finish Coat Proportions:
2.4.2.1 Portland Cement-Lime Plaster Finish Coat
Mix finish in the proportion of one part by volume of Portland cement to not more
than one part by volume of hydrated lime, and not more than 4 parts by volume of
damp loose sand. Workability shall govern the actual amount of lime and sand used
in the finish coat, within the limits specified herein. Where smooth toweled finish is
indicated, allow plaster to set up to the extent that it does not flow ahead or under the
trowel, yet has not solidified, then trowel the face lightly to embed the granules. Do
not over-trowel or burnish the surface.
2.5 Mixing
Mix materials in approved mechanical mixers of the type in which the quantity of
water can be controlled accurately and uniformly, except that finish coats containing
Page | 197
lime may be hand mixed. While the mixer is in continuous operation, add
approximately 90 percent of the estimated quantity of water, half of the sand, all of
the cementitious materials, and introduce the other one-half of the sand into the mixer
in that sequence and mix thoroughly with the remainder of the water until the mixture
is uniform in color and consistency. Avoid excessive mixing or agitation. Discard
plaster which has begun to set before it is used; re-tempering will not be permitted.
Do not use caked, or lumped materials. Empty mixers and mixing boxes after each
batch is mixed, and keep free of old plaster.
3.1 Preparation of Surfaces
Clean surfaces to which plaster is to be applied of all projections, dust, loose particles,
grease, bond breakers, and foreign matter. Do not apply plaster directly to (1) surfaces
of masonry or concrete that has been coated with bituminous compound or other
waterproofing agents, or (2) to surfaces that have been painted. Before plaster work
is started, wet masonry and concrete surfaces thoroughly with a fine fog spray of clean
water to produce a uniformly moist condition. Check metal grounds, corner beads,
screeds, and other accessories carefully for alignment before the work is started.
Check expansion and control joints and supporting metal structures to ensure that
expansion and control joints can move unrestrained.
3.2 Application of Plaster
3.2.1 General
Plaster may be applied by hand or by machine. When a plastering machine is used

the fluidity of Portland cement lime plaster shall be controlled to have a slump of not
more than 63 mm when tested using a 50 by 100 by 150 mm high slump cone.
Subsequent to determining water content to meet this slump, do not add additional
water to the mix. Conduct the slump test according to the following procedure.
3.2.1.1 Place cone on level, dry, no absorptive base plate.
3.2.1.2 While holding cone firmly against base plate, fill cone with plaster taken directly from
the hose or nozzle of the plastering machine, tamping with metal rod during filling to
release air bubbles.
3.2.1.3 Screed off plaster level with top of cone. Remove cone by lifting it straight up with a
slow and smooth motion.
3.2.1.4 Place cone in a vertical position adjacent to freed plaster sample, using care not to
jiggle base plate.
Page | 198
3.2.1.5 Lay a straight edge across top of cone, again being careful not to vibrate cone.
Measure slump in inches from the bottom edge of the straightedge to the top of the
slumped plaster sample
3.2.2 Workmanship:
Apply plaster in three coats, except as follows:
3.2.2.1 Provide scratch coat. Apply base coats with sufficient pressure and plaster shall be
sufficiently plastic to provide a good bond to bases. Work base coats into screed at
intervals of from 1.50 to 240. Plaster shall not be continuous across expansion and
control joints occurring in walls, and partitions. Finish plasterwork level, plumb,
square, and true, within a tolerance of 3 mm in 240 meters, without waves, cracks,
blisters, pits, crazing, discoloration, projections, or other imperfections. Form
plasterwork carefully around angles and contours, and well up to screeds. Special care
shall be taken to prevent sagging and consequent dropping of applications. There shall
be no visible junction marks in finish coat where one day’s work adjoins another.
3.2.3 Application of Plaster Finish Coat
Apply the plaster finish coat immediately two (2) hours to four (4) hours
after the rough plaster is applied on the concrete wall. Apply two (2) to
three (3) mm thickness and smoothen the wall with the use of a trowel.
3.3 Portland Cement – Lime Plaster
Apply base coats with sufficient pressure to curl the keys around the back of metal
lath or wire fabric and to provide good bond on masonry or concrete bases.
3.3.1 Plaster except Scratch Coat for Ceramic Tile Backing
Apply in three coats to a thickness of not less than 16 mm. Apply the scratch coat not
less than 6 mm thick, lightly score horizontally, and moist cure for not less than 24
hours. Apply the brown coat after the scratch coat has been aged at least 24 hours in
addition to the moist curing period. Apply the brown coat to bring the base coat out
to the screeds, compact and straighten to a true surface with rod and darby, and float
to receive the finish coat. After the brown coat has been moist cured for not less than
24 hours and aged at least than additional 5 days, apply the finish coat to a thickness
of not less than 3 mm. Where any previous coat has become dry, dampen the surface
evenly with water, prior to the application of the next coat. The finish coat for plaster
shall have a toweled finish. Moist cure plaster for 24 hours using a fine fog spray of
water and apply to the finish coat as frequently as required to prevent dry-out of the
plaster. Do not saturate the plaster to the point where free water stands on the surface.
Prevent staining of the finish coat. Provide moist curing.
Page | 199
3.3.2 Scratch Coat for Ceramic Tile Backing
Apply scratch coat and keep continuously damp for not less than 24 hours before tile
is to be set. Apply scratch coat in thickness indicated or as necessary to bring the face
of the tile to the required plane, but not less as 6 mm from the face of the material it
is being applied to and with a level surface within a tolerance of 6 mm in 2.40 meters.
Apply scratch coat after substantial grounds, plugs, hangers and other electrical
outlets, and other fixtures and fittings have been installed that are to be secured to tiled
and marbled surfaces. Apply scratch coat with sufficient pressure to ensure a proper
bond and key with the base and a proper base for the setting bed. While the mortar is
still plastic, cut the scratch coat with a trowel at internal vertical angles to the depth
of the coat and for the full height of the tile bed, score horizontally or cross-scratch
coats within one hour after mixing, and at no time shall the mortar be re-tempered.
Protect scratch coat and keep moist during curing period. A leveling coat of the same
mix specified for the scratch coat shall be applied over the scratch coat when the
surface of the scratch coat is not level within the specified tolerance or when a base
coat thickness of more than 19 mm is required. Scratch leveling coat and cure for not
less than 24 hours.
Upon completion of the building, cut out and patch loose, cracked, damaged, or
defective plaster. Patching shall match existing work in texture, color and shall be
finished flush with plaster previously applied. Do pointing and patching of plaster
work abutting or adjoining any other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner.
Remove plaster droppings or spattering from surfaces, in condition ready to receive
paint or other finish. Remove protective covering from floors and other surfaces,
and rubbish and debris from the building.
All cement plaster finish shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for
plastering work actually completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
The plastering work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities
shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation
including labor, materials, tools and equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete
this item.
Page | 200

NO.
1027 (1) a Cement Plaster Finish (on Concrete Masonry Units) sq.m.
1027 (1) a.1 Cement Plaster Finish (on Concrete Structural Members) sq.m.
1027 (1) b.3 Cement Plaster Finish: 15mm x 20mm Ø PVC Groove l.m.
Line
1027 (1) c.1 Cement Plaster Finish: Exposed Construction, Soffit of sq.m.
Slab (Smooth Cement Finish)
1027 (1) d.4 Cement Plaster Finish: Drip Mould, 20mm Ø l.m.
1027 (1) d.5 Cement Plaster Finish: Drip Mould, 25mm Ø l.m.
Page | 201
ITEM 1027 STONE WALL CLADDING WORKS
1027.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials including

equipment and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation
of stone wall cladding works as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of each type of stone wall cladding.

. .
1.3.1 Deliver materials (except bulk materials) in manufacturer’s unopened containers fully
damage.
2.1 Materials
Stone wall cladding materials shall be of the best of their respective kinds, in sizes
and colors as shown on the plans, details and finish schedules or otherwise specified
herein. Stone wall cladding materials shall be “Craft Stone Cypress by Stone
Works” or approved equivalent.
Stone wall cladding colors and patterns shall be as selected. Colors and patterns by
reference to manufacturer’s name and designations are for color and pattern
identification only and are not intended to limit selection of other manufacture’s
products with similar color and patterns.
2.2 Hydrated Lime
2.3 Sand
Page | 202
2.4 Water
Water shall be clean and potable.
2.5 Portland Cement
3.1 Installation
All wall surfaces to receive stone cladding work shall be cleaned of loose materials
and given proper surface preparation.
3.2 Application of Scratch Coat
3.2.1 Thoroughly dampen, but not saturate, surfaces of masonry before applying the scratch
coat. Make surface areas appear slightly damp. Allow no free water on the surface.
3.2.2 On masonry, first apply a thin coat with great pressure, and then bring it out
sufficiently to compensate for the major irregularities on the masonry surfaces to a
thickness of not less than 6 mm at any point.
3.2.3 Evenly rake scratch coats, but not dash coats, to provide good mechanical key for
3.2.4 On surfaces not sufficiently rough to provide good mechanical key, dash on the first
coat with a whisk by broom or fiber brush using a strong whipping motion. Do not
travel or otherwise disturb mortar applied by dashing until it is hardened.
3.3 Stone Wall Cladding Installation on Mortar Bed
3.3.1 Before application of mortar bed, dampen the surface of the scratch coat evenly to
obtain uniform section.
3.3.2 Use temporary or spot grounds to control the thickness of the mortar bed. Fill out the
3.3.3 Apply the mortar bed over an area no greater than can be covered with stone while
the coat is still plastic.
Page | 203
3.3.4 Allow no single applications of mortar to 19 mm thick.
3.3.5 Completely immerse stone in clean water and soak it at least ½ hour. After removal,
stack stone on edge long enough to drain off excess water. Re-soak and drain
individual stone then dry along edges. Allow no moisture to remain on the back of
stone during setting.
3.3.6 Apply a bond coat 10 mm thick to the plastic setting bed or to the back of each sheet
or tile.
3.3.7 Press stone firmly into the bed and beat into place within 1 hour.
3.4 Grouting
3.4.1 After stone has sufficiently set, force a maximum of grout into joints by trowel, brush
or finger application.
3.4.2 Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion-edge stone to the depth of the
cushion.
3.4.3 Fill all joints of square-edged stone flush with the surface of the stone. Fill all gaps or
sips.
3.4.4 During grouting clean all excess grout off with clean burlap, other cloth or sponges.
3.5 Cleaning
Sponge and wash stone cladding thoroughly with clean water after the grout has
stiffened. Then clean by rubbing with damp cloth or sponges and polish clean with
dry cloth.
3.6 Sealer
After installation apply sealer over stone works. Apply acrylic emulsion coating on
stone cladding interior application and acrytex clear on stone cladding exterior
application.
actually laid with stone cladding works and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Page | 204
Stone wall cladding works determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full

NO.
1027 (3) a Decorative Stone Wall Cladding (Natural Finish) sq.m.
1027 (3) b Synthetic Stone Wall Accent sq.m.
1027 (3) d Natural Stone Wall Cladding sq.m.
Page | 205
ITEM 1030 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
1030.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of acoustical
treatment work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Data
Standard catalog data for acoustical units and suspension systems
Test reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that acoustical ceiling

systems meet specified requirements. Data attesting to conformance of the proposed
system to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. requirements for the fire endurance rating
listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory may be submitted for approval in lieu of test
reports.
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Instructions
Shall be submitted showing printed instructions covering installation of Acoustic

Materials and Suspension Systems.
1.2.4 Submit 2 sets of 200mm x 200mm sample with proper label or manufacturer’s tag
indicating material descriptions.
1.3 Design Criteria for Ceiling System
1.3.1 Fire Endurance
The fire endurance (separation) rating of ceiling system(s), including ceiling

penetrations such as light fixtures and electric boxes, shall be non-combustible Flame
spread of acoustical units shall be 25 or less and smoke development shall be 50 or
less.
1.3.2 Ceiling Sound Transmission Class
The ceiling sound transmission class (ceiling STC range) of the ceiling system shall
be 35-39 when determined in accordance with CISCA Test Method AMA-1-II and
Page | 206
reported in accordance with ASTM E 413 for 16 frequency data. Test ceiling shall
be continuous at the partition and shall be assembled in the suspension system in the
same manner that the ceiling will be installed on the project.
1.3.3 Ceiling Sound Absorption
The Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) shall be determined in accordance with

ASTM C 423 Method of Test.
Deliver acoustical units in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand
name and type clearly marked. Handle materials carefully and store them under cover
in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before installation, store acoustical units
for not less than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space
where they will be installed.
Maintain a uniform temperature of not more than 30 degrees C and a relative humidity
of not more than 70 percent continuously before, during, and after installation of
acoustical units. Interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and terrazzo work
shall be completed and dry before installation. Mechanical, electrical and other work
above the ceiling line shall be completed and approved prior to the start of acoustical
ceiling installation.
2.1 Acoustic Units
2.1.1 Composition Lay in Panels by Armstrong:
a) Type: Ultima RH99, medium texture
Physical Data
Material: Wet formed mineral Fiber, with durabrite

acoustically transparent membrane.
Page | 207
Surface Finish : Factory applied acrylic latex paint.

Color : White
Sizes : 600 mm x 600 mm x 19 mm thick
600 mm x 1200 mm x 19 mm thick
NRC : 0.70
Flame Spread : Class A, flame spread 25 or under, BS
8476 Part 6&7, Class 0/Class 1
Edge Profile : Square lay-in
2.2 Suspension System
a. Type: Exposed grid.
b. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty.
c. Finish: Surfaces exposed to view shall be uniform width and shall be

aluminum with factory applied white powder coated finish.
d. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard hold down clips and wall or

edge moldings.
e. Seismic Requirements: Where substantiating design calculations

are not provided; horizontal restraints shall be reflected by four gage 12 (2.65
mm) wires secured to the main runner within 50 mm of the cross runner
intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other at an angle not exceeding
45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling. A strut fastened to the main runner
shall be extended to and fastened to the structural members supporting the
roof or floor above. These horizontal restraint points shall be placed within
1800 mm from each wall. Attachment of the restrain wires to the structure
above shall be adequate for the load imposed.
Lateral-force bracing members shall be spaced a minimum of 150 mm from

the horizontal piping or ductwork that is not provide with bracing restrains
for horizontal forces. Bracing wires shall be attached to the grid and to the
structure in such a manner that they can support a design load of not less than
200 pounds (890 Newtons) or the actual design load, whichever is greater,
with a safety factor of 2.
f. Accessibility: Two panels 600 mm by 1200 mm in size within each room

shall provide direct access to the space above the ceiling.
Locate as directed. All other acoustical panels within the grid shall be
demountable through the access panel opening.
Page | 208
2.2.1 Hangers
Hanger wire shall be 12-gage 2 millimeter galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire
in accordance with ASTM C 636.
2.3 Acoustical Sealant
Synthetic rubber or polymeric-based material and having the following properties:
a. Consistency: 290 to 310
b. Aging: Slightly tacky at 71 degrees C after 50 days.
c. Accelerated Aging: No significant change after 260 hours in

weatherometer.
d. Non-staining.
e. Solids Content: Approximately 80 to 90 percent.
f. No oil migration.
2.4 Acoustical Tile Adhesive
Adhesive shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.5 Identification of Access Panels
Identify ceiling access panel by a number utilizing white identification plates or

plastic buttons with contrasting numerals. The plates or buttons shall be of minimum
25 mm diameter and securely attached to one corner of each access unit. The code
identification system shall be as follows:
a. Air conditioning controls.

b. Air conditioning duct system.
c. Intercommunication system.
Provide a typewritten card framed under glass, listing the code identification numbers
and the corresponding system description listed above. Mount the framed card where
directed and furnish a duplicate to the Architect.
Page | 209
Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for unevenness,

irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of the work.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Suspended Ceilings:
Install the suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636 and the following
additional requirements.
3.2.1.1 Hangers
Hangers shall be spaced at 1200 mm on each direction. Hangers shall be laid out for
each individual room or space. Install additional hangers where required to support
framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles and other penetrations through the
ceiling.
3.2.1.2 Suspension Members
Keep main runners and carrying channels clear of abutting walls and partitions.
Provide at least two main runners for each ceiling span.
3.2.1.3 Acoustical Units
Edges of ceiling tiles shall be in close contact with metal supports and in true
alignment. Arrange units so that units less than 1/2 width is minimized.
3.2.1.4 Wall or Edge Molding
Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter
corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.
3.2.1.5 Hold down Clips
Provide hold down clips for all panels and around troffer lights.
3.2.1.6 Calking
Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the ceiling. Apply a
continuous ribbon at acoustical sealant on vertical web of wall or edge moldings.
3.2.1.7 Seismic Restraint System
Provide seismic restraint for the suspension system
Page | 210
3.3 Cleaning
Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. Touch up scratches,

abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces. Remove damaged or
improperly installed units and install new materials.
actually installed with acoustic ceiling work inclusive of suspension system and
Acoustic ceiling work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.

NO.
1030 (1) a.1 19mm Thk x 600 x 600mm Ceiling Panel sq.m.
Page | 211
ITEM 1030 SOUND CONTROL WALL TREATMENT
1030.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of sound
control wall treatment as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. The work
shall include plywood panels, veneered wall panel, SLFA low frequency wall panels,
and fabric wall cover, accessories and other necessary supplementary materials as
required for a complete and proper installation.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation
only.
1.2.1 American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM C423-84A – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound
Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
ASTM E336-84 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound

Insulation in Buildings
ASTM E413-73- Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class
ASTM E596-88- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise
Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Manufacturer's Data: Standard catalog data for sound control wall treatment
components.
1.3.2 Certificates of Conformance: Submit certificates for all materials attesting that sound
control wall treatment components meet the specified requirements.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Instructions: Shall be submitted showing printed instructions

covering installation of Sound Control Wall Treatment.
Page | 212
1.3.4 Submit samples with proper label or manufacturer’s tag indicating material
descriptions.
1.4 Design Criteria for Sound Control Wall Treatment
1.4.1 Fire Endurance: The fire endurance rating of wall treatment systems, including wall
penetrations such as light fixtures, pipes, and electric boxes, shall be Class 1 fire rated.
Flame spread of special ceiling treatment shall be 25 or less and smoke development
shall be 50 or less.
1.4.2 Wall Sound Absorption: The Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) shall be 0.60 -
0.90determined in accordance with ASTM C 423 Method of Test.
1.5.1 Installer’s Qualifications: Installation, disassembly and reassembly shall be by

manufacturer or shall be under direct supervision of manufacturer.
Deliver sound control wall treatment components in the manufacturer's original

unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Handle materials
carefully and store them under cover in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately
before installation, store wall units at the same temperature and relative humidity as
the space where they will be installed.
Maintain a uniform temperature of not more than 30 degrees C and a relative humidity
of not more than 70 percent continuously before, during, and after installation of
sound control wall treatment components.
Do not install sound control wall treatment components until mortar, wet and dust
producing trades have completed their work and finish floor is in place.
1.9 Warranty
Provide manufacturer’s written warranty that the products found to be not in

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents within a period of one
(1) year after date of commencement of warranties shall be corrected promptly after
receipt of written notice from Owner.
Page | 213
1030.2 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Plywood: Shall be 6 mm thick plywood and shall bear the mark of a recognized
association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over
the quality of plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or
span rating, and shall show exposure durability classification, grade, and
compliance with PTS 631-02.
2.1.2 Low Frequency Wall Panels: Shall be “Sorba” SLFA low frequency sound absorber
Acoustic wall panels, designed for areas that require sound absorption in the low-to-
middle frequencies while preserving higher-frequency sound.
2.1.3 Wall Panels: Shall be “Sorba” wall panels designed for acoustic and aesthetic needs
with strong sound-absorbing performance, durability and elegant in appearance.
Examine surfaces to receive directly attached the sound control wall treatment for
unevenness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of
the work.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Sound Control Wall Treatment: Install sound control wall treatment and components
in accordance with Manufacturer’s printed instructions and approved shop drawings.
3.3 Cleaning
3.3.1 Clean all surfaces according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3.2 Remove all packaging and construction debris.
actually installed with sound control wall treatment work inclusive of suspension
system and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 214
Sound control wall treatment work shall be determined and provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment

NO.
1030 (1) c.1 Decorative Acoustic Wall Panel System: 500 x500mm sq.m.
Panels with 25mm Thk Insulation infill
Page | 215
ITEM 1032 CHEMICAL RESISTANT EPOXY COATING
1032.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including

equipment, and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application
of chemical resistant epoxy coating as shown on the drawings and as specified
herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including basic

materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified.
1.2.2 Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Resubmit 300
mm square in each finish specified.
1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary chemical-resistant seamless, epoxy

coating materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish or sealing coats
from a single manufacturer with not less than three (3) years of successful
experience in supplying principal materials for work of type described in this
section. Provide secondary materials on of type and form source recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
1.3.2 Prime Coat: Apply 100% solid epoxy primer clear over prepared substrate at
manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate. Coordinate timing of primer
application with application of topping mix to insure optimum adhesion between
chemical resistant epoxy coating material and substrate.
1.3.3 Topping Mix: Apply 100% solid Epoxy Coating Compound as topping mix (color
as per Owner’s specification) over applied Primer Coat after 3-4 hours tack-free-
time.
1.3.4 Finish or Sealing Coat: After topping mix has cured sufficiently for 24 hours under
normal condition, apply epoxy flooring compound (100% solids) clear color as
finish or sealing coat of type required by the manufacturer to produce required finish
indicated and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by
manufacturer.
Page | 216
1.4.1 The owner reserves the right to invoke the following material testing procedure
at any time, and any number of times during period of epoxy application.
1.4.2 The owner will engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample
materials being used. Samples of material will be taken, identified and sealed, and
certified in the presence of contractor.
2.1 Manufacturer
Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating shall be by “Sealbond Chemical Industries Inc.”
2.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to the respective specification and standards and to the
2.2.1 Primer Coat: Apply one (1) full coat seal bond epoxy primer clear 100% solids
(EPC-100).
2.2.2 Topping Mix: Apply 3mm thick epoxy mortar (mixture of 1 gallon seal bond epoxy
flooring compound 100% solids EFC-100 to 4kgs. Silica and Filler
2.2.3 Finish or Sealing Coat: Apply one (1) full coat Seal bond Epoxy Flooring
Compound clear 100% solids (EFC-100).
2.2.4 Allow to cure for at least seven (7) days.
3.1.2 Surface to be coated must be dry and free of oil, dirt, grease, dust, loose particles
and other contaminants. Old lining must be completely removed. Concrete should
be neutralized or acid-etched and washed thoroughly. Mechanical tool cleaning is
also recommended to slightly roughen the surface to make primer application in
good adhesion with the prepared surface.
Page | 217
3.2 Application
3.2.1 Comply with epoxy flooring manufacturer’s written instructions for installation of
chemical resistant epoxy flooring system, including cleaning, joint treatment,
flashing, reinforcement, accessory items and surfacing. Apply materials minimum
of 3 mm thickness epoxy flooring compound by methods as instructed by epoxy
manufacturer to provide uniform thickness.
3.2.2 Coordination: Proceed with epoxy work only after substrate construction, including
curbs; spill dams and equipment pads, and penetrating work through substrate have
been completed. No phased construction will be permitted.
3.3 Adjusting, Cleaning and Protection
3.3.1 Upon completion of the work, repair surfaces that have been permanently stained,
marred, or otherwise damaged. Replace work that is damaged or cannot be
adequately cleaned as directed.
3.3.2 Upon completion of work, remove unused materials, debris, containers and
equipment from the project site. In addition to the initial cleaning procedure
required, clean the work before acceptance by the owner.
3.3.3 Protect the work during the construction period so that it will be without any
indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance.
3.3.4 Until the epoxy flooring is fully cured and protected with temporary covering during
the construction period, keep the coating areas free from traffic and other trades.
Construction manager shall provide necessary temporary protection to prevent
damage, such as caused by traffic, gouging, scraping, and spillage of deleterious
substances, excessive heat or other manner.
All chemical resistant epoxy coating shall be measured in square meters or part
thereof for plastering work actually completed and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
The chemical resistant epoxy work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill
of Quantities shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full
compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment, and incidentals
necessary to complete this item.
Page | 218
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1032 PAINTING OF BUILDINGS, FIELD

PAINTING
Page | 219
ITEM 1032 EPOXY COATING
1032.1 DESCRIPTION
1.4 Scope

equipment, and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application
of epoxy coating as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical information including basic

materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified.
1.5.2 Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Resubmit
samples as requested by the Architect until the required color and texture are
achieved.
1.6.1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary chemical-resistant seamless, epoxy

coating materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish or sealing coats
from a single manufacturer with not less than three (3) years of successful
experience in supplying principal materials for work of type described in this
section. Provide secondary materials only of type and form source recommended
by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.6.2 Prime Coat: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer’s recommended
spreading rate. Coordinate timing of primer application with application of topping
mix to insure optimum adhesion between chemical-resistant epoxy coating
materials and substrate.
1.6.3 Finish or Sealing Coat: After topping mix has cured sufficiently, apply finish or
sealing coat of type required by the manufacturer to produce required finish
indicated and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by
manufacturer.
1.7.1 The owner reserves the right to invoke the following material testing procedure at
any time, and any number of times during period of epoxy application.
Page | 220
1.4.1.1 The owner will engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample
materials being used. Samples of material will be taken, identified and sealed, and
certified in the presence of contractor.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 Epoxy Coating: Shall be epoxy self-smoothing and coating system. Epoxy coating
shall be similar to “Sikafloor 263 SL HC ral 7032” 1.2 mm thick by Sika Philippines,
Inc.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Comply with epoxy coating manufacturers written instructions for installation
of epoxy coating system, including surface preparation, joint treatment, flashing,
reinforcement, accessory items and surfacing. Apply materials by methods as
instructed by epoxy manufacturer to provide uniform thickness.
3.1.2 Application: New concrete should be cured with polyethylene burlap of water. Any
curing membranes must be completely removed by mechanical means such as
blasting. Concrete surfaces must at least have slight textured surfaces for the best
bond. Apply mixture on the primed areas by the use of appropriate notched trowel
to spread the mixture to the desired thickness and spike roller to level the applied
epoxy.
3.1.3 Coordination: Proceed with epoxy work only after substrate construction, including
curbs, equipment pads, and penetrating work through substrate have been
completed. No phased construction will be permitted.
3.2 Adjusting, Cleaning and Protection
3.2.1 Upon completion of the work, repair surfaces that have been permanently stained,
marred, or otherwise damaged. Replace work that is damaged or cannot be
adequately cleaned as directed.
3.2.2 Upon completion of the work, remove unused materials, debris, containers and
equipment from the project site. In addition to the initial cleaning procedure
required, clean the work before acceptance by the Owner.
Page | 221
3.2.3 Protect the work during the construction period so that it will be without any
indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance.
3.2.4 Until the epoxy coating is fully cured and protected with a temporary covering
during the construction period, keep the coating areas free from traffic and other
trades. Construction manager shall provide necessary temporary protection to
prevent damage, such as caused by traffic, gouging, scraping, spillage of deleterious
substances, excessive heat, or other manner.
actually installed with epoxy coating and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Epoxy coating work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1032 PAINTING OF BUILDING (FIELD

PAINTING)
Page | 222
ITEM 1032 PAINTING OF BUILDING (FIELD PAINTING)
1032.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application all field
painting works as shown on the drawings and schedule of finishes and as specified
herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
Before work is started, or sample panels are prepared, submit manufacturer's

literature, indicating brand names, product type color, gloss level, coating
composition, manufacturers name or product number where applicable, and
certificates as specified.
1.2.2 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance:
Submit certificate attesting that the products have been tested and meet the specified
requirements.
1.2.3 Sample Panels
Submit sample panels showing each type of finish and color specified.
Deliver coatings and coating materials in unopened original container bearing the
manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, batch number,
color, date of manufacture, and manufacturer's instructions for application. Restrict
storage of coatings and coating materials and the mixing of coatings to the locations
directed.
1.4 Selection of Colors
Colors of finish coats shall be as approved by the Architect and Owner.

Manufacturer's name and color designation, if indicated, are used for the purpose of
color designations only and are acceptable for use on this project only if they conform
to all specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the
color closely approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to all specified
requirements.
Page | 223
1.5 Description of Work
Surfaces concealed by portable objects and by surface mounted articles readily

detachable by removal of fasteners such as screws and bolts are included in the work.
Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panel boards, fixed ductwork,
machinery, and equipment fixed in place are not included. Remove articles
obstructing access to those surfaces specified to be included in the work and restore
to their original position on completion. Do not coat surfaces in concealed spaces
unless specifically so stated. Do not coat surfaces of steel to be embedded in concrete.
Do not coat copper, stainless steel, and aluminum except where specifically so stated
and except where surfaces have existing coatings. Do not coat new factory finished
material except those that require identification or color coding and those
factory-finished surfaces which are damaged during installation. Restore damaged
factory-finished surfaces to their original condition. Do not paint zinc-coated ducts,
zinc-coated pipe, or copper pipe in concealed spaces.
1.5.1 Exterior Painting
Exterior painting shall include new surfaces, including items on or a part of the roof
which are not factory-finished.
1.5.2 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces, and appurtenances of the types listed. Where a space or
surface, supports, hangers, and miscellaneous metalwork, except as specified
otherwise herein.
1.5.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes the field coating as required of interior and exterior piping, conduit,
ductwork, supports, hangers, air grilles, registers, miscellaneous, and coverings
where required, except as specified otherwise herein
2.1 Materials
Paints enamels, coating, primers and stains shall be "best-in-line" product

manufactured by Boysen, Davies or approved equal.
2.1.1 Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content of over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.
Page | 224
3.1 Protection of Areas and Spaces
Remove, mask, or otherwise protect prior to surface preparation and painting

operations such items as hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator
covers, plates, lighting fixture, and similar items in contact with coated surfaces.
Following completion of painting, reinstall removed items utilizing workmen skilled
in the trades involved for such removal and reinstallation. Protect from contamination
by coating materials all surfaces not to be coated. Restore surfaces that are
contaminated by painting materials to original condition.
Remove all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil and other deleterious
substance from all surfaces which are to be coated or otherwise finished. Allow putty
to set one week before coating. Calking and glazing compounds shall be allowed to
cure for times stated in manufacturer's literature prior to being coated. Sandpaper
entire surface of existing enamel and other glossy surfaces before application of any
coatings. Inspect surfaces after preparation and receive approval before application
of any coatings. On surface to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime with
a brush all exposed nails and other ferrous metal with zinc chromate primer.
3.2.1 Concrete and Masonry
Remove dirt, fungus, grease, and oil prior to application of coatings. Wash new
surfaces with a solution composed of from 14 to 56 grams of tri-sodium phosphate
per 1 liter of hot water and rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Wash previously
coated surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse thoroughly. Remove glaze, all
loose particles, and scale by wire brushing. Remove efflorescence by scraping, wire
brushing, and washing with 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid and then wash thoroughly with fresh water, removing all
traces of the acid. Give all new surfaces to be painted with other than cement water
paint a neutralizing treatment consisting of 0.23 kg. of zinc sulphate in 1 liter of warm
water. Apply the neutralizer liberally and allow to dry, then rinse the surfaces
thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry for not less than 48 hours before paint
is applied.
3.2.2 Plaster
Prior to painting, repair all joints, cracks, holes, and other surface defects with
patching plaster or spackling compound and sand out smooth. New plaster to be
coated shall have an instrument-measured moisture content of not more than 8
percent. In addition to moisture content requirements, allow new
Page | 225
3.2.3 New Unprimed Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean zinc coated surfaces with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean, dry
cloths. Immediately after cleaning and treating, apply pretreatment wash primer, to
a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.5 mil on zinc coated, and ferrous surfaces. Apply
primer as soon as practicable after pretreatment has dried. Surface preparation shall
be in strict compliance with steel structure painting SSPC SP-10 near white metal
blast cleaning also known as through blast cleaning using dry abrasive.
3.2.4 New Hot Metal Surfaces
Clean new surfaces down to clean bare metal free of mil scale, rust, oil, oxides, dust,
coatings and contaminates. Apply new coatings before any new oxidation or
contamination begins. Surface preparation shall be in strict compliance with steel
structures.
3.3 Application
Provide finished surfaces free from burns, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and
variations in colors. Avoid contamination of other surfaces repair all damage thereto.
Allow sufficient time between coats to permit thorough drying and provide each coat
in proper condition to receive the next coat. Each coat shall cover the surface of the
preceding coat or surface completely; there shall be an easily perceptible difference in
shades of successive coats. Thoroughly clean dust-free before and during the
application of coating material. Prior to erection, used two coats of the designated
primer to treat and prime wood and metal surfaces, which will be inaccessible after
erection. Thoroughly work painting materials into all joints, crevices, and open spaces.
Finished surfaces shall be smooth, even and free of defects. Retouch damaged painting
before applying succeeding coats of paint. Spray painting operations shall comply
with the best procedural trade practice. Procure and utilize the engineering controls
and/or personal protective equipment necessary for safe and effective application of
specified paint systems. Apply strains in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instruction.
Storing, thinning, mixing, handling and applications of painting materials shall be in

strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and instruction. Unless
otherwise recommended by the paint manufacturer, painting shall be done when:
a. Metal surface temperature is at least 3°C more than dew point temperature
b. Ambient temperature is above 10°C
c. Relative humidity is less than 85%
Page | 226
d. Application of paints shall be done by Airless Spray Equipment. Pigmented

and catalyzed materials shall be thoroughly mixed and strained before
applying. Materials that have not been applied within the pot life period
specified by manufacturer shall be discarded and properly disposed of.
3.3.1 Equipment
Apply coatings carefully with good, clean brushes or approved spray equipment,
except as specified otherwise. Spray areas made inaccessible to brushing by ducts
and other equipment. Use airless type spray equipment. Use approved rollers for
the application of flat latex coatings to interior walls and ceilings.
3.3.2 Thinning of Paints
Reduce to proper brushing consistency by adding fresh paint, except that when
thinning is not mandatory for the type of paint being used.
3.3.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not apply exterior coatings in rainy weather or when the temperature of the air at
the surface is over 35 degrees C. Apply interior coatings when the surfaces to be
painted are dry and the temperature can be kept below 95 degrees F during the
applications of ordinary paints between 65 degrees F and 95 degrees F during the
application of enamels and varnishes.
3.3.4 Special Requirements for Coating Concrete Masonry Surfaces with Acrylic
Emulsion Paint: Requires containers be marked for the formulation and mixing of
fill coat. The fill coat shall conform to these markings except as specified herein.
3.3.4.1 Mixing of Fill Coat
The formula given in Acrylic Emulsion Paint for the content of the fill coat requires
a definite amount of water to be added in preparation of the mixture. This
requirement shall not apply. Deliver the sand, cement, and mixing liquids pre-
proportioned and packaged so that field proportioning will not be required. Field
mix the mixing liquid with the sand and cement; after this mixture is thoroughly
blended, add water as necessary to produce a rich, creamy mixture of proper
brushing consistency. Mix the fill coat materials by hand but do not vigorously
agitate. After mixing, allow to set for 10 minutes to permit air to escape before
applying. The fill coat mixture will gradually thicken with time; add small amounts
of water, when necessary, to keep the mixture a rich brushing consistency. Do not
begin mixing more than one hour before application.
3.3.4.2 Wetting of Surface
Page | 227
Before applying filler coat, thoroughly wet the masonry and concrete to control
surface suction and provide a reserve of moisture to aid in curing the paint. A garden
hose nozzle adjusted to a fine spray is adequate for the purpose. Do not dampen
with a brush dipped in water. Dampen the masonry and concrete in one operation
not more than one hour nor less than 30 minutes before painting. Apply the spray in
such manner that each part is sprayed three or four times for about 10 seconds. Allow
time between applications for the water to soak into the surface. If the surface tends
to dry rapidly, as in hot weather, re--dampen slightly just in advance of painting.
The surface shall be moist but without free water when paint is applied.
3.3.4.3 Application
Do not paint when the paint may be exposed to temperatures below 40 degrees F
within 48 hours after application or when the temperature is over 95 degrees F. Rub
the filler coat into the surface in such a manner as to fill all depressions, holes, voids,
joints, and hollows. Apply the filler coat with stiff fiber bristle brushes with bristles
not longer than 2-1/2 inches, using a circular motion. Give the surface a final stroke
parallel to the course of block. Provide uniform coverage and laps well brushed out.
Apply the first finish coat at a rate of not less than one gallon per 250 square feet;
apply the second finish coat at the rate of not less than one gallon per 300 square
feet. Brush applied finish coats, except that behind large ducts and similar locations
inaccessible to a brush they may be applied by rollers. Spray application will not be
permitted. Deliver all paint to the job site prior to application. Compute the amount
of finish coat paint required and submit calculations for approval. Do not begin
painting until this amount has been approved and delivered to the job site. Apply all
delivered paint. Keep paint in tightly covered containers when not in use; keep
stirred to maintain uniform color and consistency during application. At least 24
hours shall lapse between coats; do not start another coat until the preceding coat has
become so hard that it cannot be marked with the brushes used. In hot weather,
slightly moisten the prior coat before applying the succeeding coat. Covering is not
necessary.
3.3.5 Paint Systems
New surfaces made by cleaning operations, shall receive the following coatings.
Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. each coat except as specified otherwise.
Where coating thickness is specified, it is the minimum dry film thickness.
3.3.5.1 Exterior and Interior Surfaces
a. Exterior Concrete / Masonry and Plaster Surfaces:
Concrete Neutralizer : One coat of concrete neutralizer

First Coat : One coat acrytex primer
Second Coat : One coat acrytex cast
Page | 228
Top Coat : Two coats of Acrytex semi-gloss
b. Exterior Metal Surfaces/Structural Steel Components (Brush or Roller

Application):
Primer : One coat of epoxy primer

Top Coat : Two coats of epoxy enamel
c. Interior Concrete/Fiber Cement Board/Masonry and Plaster Surfaces:
Concrete Neutralizer : One coat of concrete neutralizer

One coat of permacoat flat acrylic latex paint
Putty : Masonry putty (patching compound)
Top Coat : Two coats of permacoat acrylic semi-gloss latex
d. Exterior and Interior Wood Surfaces: (By spray application)
First Coat : One coat of lacquer primer-surfacer

Second Coat : Lacquer Spot Putty
Third Coat : One coat of lacquer primer-surfacer on puttied
areas
Top Coat : One coat of gloss lacquer enamel (Duco finish)
3.3.5.2 Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise:
a. Ceiling – Gypsum Board Surfaces:
One coat of flat acrylic latex paint

Putty : Gypsum board putty
Top coat : Two coats of permacoat acrylic semi-gloss latex
b. Steel Door, Steel Louvers, Railings and other metal finishing works
Surfaces (Spray Application):
Primer : One coat of oil based red oxide primer

Top Coat : Two coats of automotive paint
c. Wood Surfaces:
First coat : Natural wood paste filler

Second coat : Oil wood stain
Top coat : One coat of clear polyurethane coating
d. Interior Wood Surfaces: (By roller application)
Page | 229
First coat : One coat of flat enamel paint

Putty : Glazing putty
Topcoat : Two coats of quick drying enamel.
3.3.5.3 Coat other surfaces for which the type of coating has not been specified herein as
specified for surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.
3.3.5.4 Mechanical, Electrical and Miscellaneous Metal Items, Except Hot Metal Surfaces and
New Pre-finished Equipment; Pre-finishing of new mechanical and electrical
equipment is specified in the Item SPL covering the particular item.
The areas of concrete, gypsum board and metal surfaces applied with paint, and other
related coating materials shall be measured in square meters as desired and accepted
Painting works determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
furnishing all materials, tools, equipment and other incidentals necessary to complete
this Item.

NO.
1032 (1) a.2 Painting on Concrete, Exterior sq.m.
1032 (1) a.3 Painting on Concrete, Interior sq.m.
1032 (1) a.4.1 Painting on Masonry/ Concrete :100mm High l.m.

Painted Strip

Painted Strip

Painted Strip
1032 (1) a.5 Painting on Masonry/ Concrete :Acrylic sq.m.

Elastomeric Topcoat on Roofdeck
1032 (1) a.6 Painting on Concrete: Epoxy Floor Coating sq.m.
Page | 230
1032 (1) a.8 Painting on Masonry/ Concrete :Exposed sq.m.

Construction, Soffit of Slab
1032 (1) b.1 Painting Works: Wood Works (Alkyd Type sq.m.
1032 (1) b.2 Painting on Works, Ducco Finish sq.m.
1032 (1) c.2 Painting on Steel: Steel Doors and Louvers sq.m.
1032 (6) Painting Works: Painting on Gypsum Board sq.m.

Ceiling, Flat Finish
1032 (7) Painting Works: Painting on Gypsum Board sq.m.

Wall, Semi- Gloss Finish
1032 (8) Painting Works: Painting on Fiber Cement sq.m.

Board Ceiling
1032 (1) a.9 Painting on Masonry/ Concrete :100mm High l.m.

Base Line Chemical Epoxy Paint
Page | 231
ITEM 1032 SEALANTS AND CAULKING
1032.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper application of all sealants
and caulking work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
C 834-76 Latex Sealing Compounds

(Rev.86)
C 920-86 Elastomeric Joint Sealants
1.3 Submittals
Submit certificates from the manufacturers attesting that materials meet the specified
requirements.
1.3.2 Manufacturers' Data
Clearly mark data to identify material type provided. Submit complete descriptive
data for:
1.3.2.1 Sealants
Data for sealant and caulking shall include application instructions and precautions,
self life, mixing instructions for multi-component sealants and cleaning solvent.
Silicone sealant should not be used in all the buildings.
1.3.2.2 Primers
1.3.2.3 Backstop Materials
1.3.3 Colors
Page | 232
Submit one sample of each color for each sealant type to verify that products match
the colors indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit not less than 3 different
samples of manufacturer's standard colors.
1.3.4 Manufacturer's Test Report
Indicate sealant compatibility with commonly used substrates.
1.4 Sample Joints
Before sealant work is started, provide a sample of each type of finished joint where
directed. Sample shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of sealant. The
workmanship, bond, and color of sealant work throughout the project shall match the
approved sample joints.
The ambient temperature shall be within the limits of 40 and 100 degrees F when the
sealant is applied.
Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external shipping

containers, unopened, with brand names, date of manufacture and material designation
clearly marked thereon. Elastomeric sealant containers shall be labeled as to type,
class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of
foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 37.8 degrees or
less than 4.5 degrees C.
2.1 Materials
Products shall conform to the reference documents listed for each use. Provide sealant
that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates to which it will be applied.
2.1.1 Sealant: ASTM C 834, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Location and
color of sealant shall be as follows:
Location Color
a. Small voids between walls or partitions and As selected

adjacent lockers, casework, shelving, door
frames, built-in or surface-mounted
Page | 233
equipment and fixture, and similar items.
b. Perimeter of frames at doors, windows, and As selected

access panels which adjoin exposed interior
concrete and masonry surfaces.
c. Joints of interior masonry walls and partitions As selected

which adjoin columns, pilasters, concrete
walls, and exterior walls unless otherwise
detailed.
d. Joints between edge members for acoustical As selected

tile and adjoining vertical surfaces.
e. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated As selected

or specified, where small voids exist between
materials specified to be painted.
2.1.2 Exterior Sealant
For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class
25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M,
Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Location(s) and Color(s) of sealant shall be as follows:
Location Color
a. Joints and recesses formed where frames and Match adjacent

sub sills of windows, doors, louvers, and surface color
vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or metal
frames. Use sealant at both exterior and
interior surfaces of exterior wall penetrations.
b. Masonry Joint where shelf angles occur. Match adjacent

surface color
c. Expansion and control joints
d. Interior face of expansion joints in exterior Match adjacent

concrete or masonry walls where metal expansion surface color
joint covers are not required.
e. Voids where items pass through exterior walls Match adjacent

surface color
f. Metal reglets, where flashing is inserted Match adjacent

into masonry joints, and where flashing is surface color
Page | 234
penetrated by coping dowels.
g. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is Match adjacent

indicated or specified. surface color
h. Joints between ends of fascias, copings, Match adjacent

and adjacent walls. surface color
2.1.3 Floor Joint Sealant
ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Locations and colors of sealant
shall be as follows:
Location Color
a. Seats of metal thresholds for exterior doors. Match adjacent

surface color
b. Control and expansion joints in floors, slabs, Match adjacent

ceramic tile, and walkways. surface color
2.2 Primer for Sealant
Provide a non-staining, quick-drying type of consistency recommended by the sealant

manufacturer for the particular application.
2.3 Bond Breakers
Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the
particular application.
2.4 Backstops
Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or polyethylene foams free
from oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Backstop material shall be compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types
of absorptive materials as backstops.
2.5 Cleaning Solvents
Provide types recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum and
bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEMS 1003, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1010, 1012,
AND 1014.
Page | 235
Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from dirt, frost, moisture,
grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to
destroy or impair adhesion. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing
calk or sealant prior to applying new sealant.
3.1.1 Steel Surfaces
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical or would

damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective coatings by
sandblasting or using a residue free solvent.
3.1.2 Aluminum Surfaces
Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with
sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove tape and any
residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For removing protective coatings
and final cleaning, use non-staining solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the
item(s) containing aluminum or bronze surfaces.
3.2 Sealant Preparation
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix multi-component

elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 Application
3.3.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
3.3.1.1 Acceptable Ratios
JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH
Minimum Maximum
For metal, glass, or

other nonporous surfaces:
6 mm (minimum) 6 mm 6 mm
Over 6 mm 12 mm width Equal to width
For wood, concrete, masonry,

stone:
Page | 236
6 mm (minimum) 6 mm 6 mm
Over 6 mm 6 mm Equal to width
Over 12 mm to
50 mm 12 mm 16 mm
Over 50 mm (As recommended by sealant

manufacturer)
3.3.1.2 Unacceptable Ratios
Where joints of acceptable width-to- depth ratios have not been provided, clean
out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths without
damage to the adjoining work. Grinding shall not be required on metal
surfaces.
3.3.2 Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or bottom with
backstop material to provide a joint of the depth specified. Install backstops in the
following locations:
a. Where indicated
b. Where backstops are not indicated but joint cavities exceed the
acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint
Width-to-Depth Ratios."
3.3.3 Primer
Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out all loose particles from joints.
Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to joints in concrete
masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in accordance with sealant
manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces.
3.3.4 Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant used, to prevent sealant from
adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply the bond breaker to avoid contamination
of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the
bond breaker.
3.3.5 Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the materials to which it is applied. Do not use a
sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has become too jelled to be discharge in a
Page | 237
continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions with a gun having a nozzle that fits the joint width. Force
sealant into joints to fill the joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after
application to ensure adhesion. Sealant shall be uniformly smooth and free of
wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled
joint, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified.
3.4 Protection and Cleaning
3.4.1 Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be used for
this purpose if remove 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2 Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave
the work in a clean and neat condition.
3.4.2.1 Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces
Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean
with a solvent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to
cure for 24 hours then remove by wire brushing or sanding
Sealant work under this Item shall be included in other works such as aluminum doors
and window and other related works.
The numbers of items are included in the windows and doors, satisfactorily installed
and ready for service shall be the basis for payment based on the unit bid or contract
unit price.

NO.
1032 Sealants and Caulking lm
Page | 238
ITEM 1034 DAMPPROOFING
1034.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of dampproofing as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
Submit the following for approval
Submit manufacturer’s certificates of compliance attesting that dampproofing materials

are physically and chemically compatible with each other.
Submit manufacturer’s data which includes material description and physical properties,
application details, and recommendations regarding shelf life, application procedures,
and precautions on flammability and toxicity.
1.2.3 Samples
Submit mock-up samples for dampproofing.
Deliver manufactured dampproofing materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened

containers, with labels intact and legible. Containers of materials covered by referenced
specification number shall bear the specification number, type, and class of the contents.
Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and
protect materials in sufficient quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and
protect materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, and use within their
indicated shelf life. Promptly remove from the site materials or incomplete work
adversely affected by exposure to moisture. Use pallets and canvas tarpaulins to cover
stored materials top to bottom.
2.1 Dampproofing Material
Page | 239
ASTM D4397, minimum 6-mil thick polyethylene sheet vapor barrier.
3.1 Preparation
Coordinate the work with that of other trades to assure that components to be incorporated
into the dampproofing system are available when needed. Inspect and approve surfaces
immediately before the application of the dampproofing materials.
3.2 Application
Over the 100mm thick gravel bed carefully cover it with the polyethelene sheet.
3.3 Work Sequence
Perform the work so that protection board is installed prior to using the waterproofed
surface. Do not permanently install protection board until the membrane has passed the
flood test specified under “Field Tests”. Move material storage areas as work progresses
to prevent abuse of the membrane and overloading the structural deck.
Dampproofing shall be measured by actual area installed in square meters and accepted
The area of dampproofing shall be paid for at the unit bid or contract unit price, which
payment shall constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

NO.
1034 (1) b Damp proofing : Polyethylene Sheet Vapor Barrier, 6mils sq.m.
Page | 240
ITEM 1035 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
1035.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of ceiling
suspension systems for the attachment of fiber cement board as shown on the drawing
and as specified herein.
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced.
A 463-77 Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Aluminum-Coated Type I
A 525-81 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped

Process
C 754-82 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw

Attached Plaster Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water
Resistant Backing Board.
1.3 Submittals
Manufacturer’s certificates attesting that materials meet the requirements specified

herein in referenced publications.
1.3.2 Manufacturer’s Erection Instructions
Printed instructions for the erection of metal suspension systems.
1.3.3 Sample
Submit sample with proper label or manufacturer’s tag indicating material descriptions.
Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations. Storage area shall
permit easy access for inspection and handling. If it is necessary to store
Page | 241
materials outdoors, stack materials off the ground, properly supported on a level
platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle materials carefully to prevent
damage. Remove damage items that cannot be restored to like-new conditions.
2.1 Steel framing for suspended ceilings
a. Furring Channels: ASTM C 645 gauge 24 standard channels
b. Accessories: Hanger rod shall be 6 mm diameter high carbon steel

wire with turnbuckle and hanging clips spaced at 1200 mm on each directions.
c. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754
3.1 Examination
Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which work is to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until satisfactorily conditions are corrected.
3.2 General Installation Requirements
a. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer’s instructions

(and as required to comply with seismic requirements).
b. Tolerances:
1. Do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm variation from plumb or level in exposed

lines of surface, except at joints between plaster board units.
2. Do not exceed 1.5 mm variation between planes of abutting edges or ends.
3. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.
c. Install framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements
that apply to framing installation.
3.3 Metal Support Installation
3.3.1 Ceiling and Soffit Support Systems:
Page | 242
a. Secure hangers or rods to structural support by connecting directly to

b. structure where possible; otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage
devices or fasteners indicated.
c. Space main runners, hangers and furring according to requirements of ASTM
C754, except as otherwise indicated.
d. Where spacing of structural members, or width of ducts or other equipment,
prevents regular spacing of hangers, provide supplemental hangers and
suspension members and reinforce nearest affected hangers to span extra distance.
e. Attach directly to structural elements only; do not attaché to metal deck. Loop
hangers and wire-tie directly or provide anchors or inserts.
f. Install compression posts, splay wires and other accessories as required to comply
with seismic requirements.
g. Extend runners to within 150 mm of walls.
h. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports
indicated. In fire resistance rated assemblies, wire-tie furring members, do not
clip.
i. Do not permit furring or runners to contact masonry or concrete walls.
j. Provide 25 mm clearance between furring or runners and abutting walls and
partitions.
k. For proprietary framing system, comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 Adjusting
a. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finish work.
b. Leave work smooth and uniform.
laid with ceiling suspension system and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Ceiling suspension system is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
this Item.
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY.
Page | 243
ITEM 1036 SKYLIGHTS AND FRAMES
1036.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope

equipment, and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper
installation of skylights and frames as shown on drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of skylight and framing materials, finishes and colors.
Include skylight manufacturer’s recommendations for setting and sealing

materials and for installation of the type of skylight material specified.
1.2.3 Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings indicating methods of construction, fastening system, location,

finishes, sizes thickness and framing materials, skylight materials and relationship to
adjoining work. Show complete details of setting methods and materials for the type of
skylight material specified.
Deliver skylight materials to the project site in an undamaged condition. Use care in
handling and hoisting skylight materials during transportation and at the job site.
Skylight materials and components shall be stored out of contact with the ground, so
as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise damaging.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Frames: Skylight frames shall be aluminum of sufficient thickness for the application
as shown on the drawings.
2.1.2 Skylight Glazing Material: Shall be clear 6 mm thick solid polycarbonate sheets as
manufactured by “K-Plast, Inc.”or approved equal.
Page | 244
2.1.2.1 Sealants
Shall be silicone rubber construction sealant applied or as recommended by the

manufacturer.
2.2 Accessories
As required to provide a complete installation, including skylight point clips shams,

angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide non-corroding metal accessories. Provide
primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the skylight manufacturer.
3.1 Installation
Skylight installation shall be by the manufacturer or his authorize representative written

installation instructions and in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.
3.3 Cleaning
After installation, skylight materials, framing system and accessories shall be cleaned.
Skylight panels shall be left in clear, scratch free condition inside and out
Skylights shall be measured by actual area of sheets installed respective of the

quality, type, and thickness in square meters, but shall be included in the
respective Items to which they are applied.
The area of skylights - inclusive of accessories - in square meters shall be paid for at the
unit bid or contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation including
labor, materials, tools, and incidents necessary to complete this Item.
1036 Polycarbonate Sheets, 6 mm thick solid sq.m.

clear sheet
Page | 245
ITEM 1038 BUILDING INSULATION
1038.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of building insulation
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Manufacturers’ Certificates of Conformance
Attest that the insulation meets the requirements specified herein.
1.2.1.1 Batt Insulation
1.2.2 Catalog Data
Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for insulation
1.2.2.1 Batt Insulation
1.2.3 Welded Wire Mesh, gauge 20 x 25 x 25mm mesh or as recommended by manufacturer
1.2.4 Sample: 300 mm by 300 mm of each kind
Deliver materials to the site in the original sealed wrapping bearing manufacturer’s name
and brand designation, specification number, type, grade, R-value, and class. Store and
carefully handle materials to protect from damage. Do not allow insulation materials to
become wet or soiled. Comply with Manufacturers’ recommendations for handling,
storage, and protection during installation.
1.4 Performance Requirements: Insulation material shall conform to the following

specifications:
Nominal Thickness 125mm

Nominal Density 50kg/m3
Thermal Conductivity Max. 0.036W/mK at a mean
temperature of
20degC
Thermal Resistance Minimum 19 Fft2hr/Btu
Page | 246
Water Absorption <0.20% by volume when a dry

specimen is
exposed to an
atmosphere of
95% RH at
50degC for 96
hours
Alkalinity pH 9 slightly alkaline
Fire Hazard Indices Class 0 AS 530 Part III or ASTM
E84
Operating Service Temp. Range Up to intermittent 300degC
1.5 Surface Burning Characteristics: Insulation shall have a maximum flame spread
index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84. Flame spread and smoke developed indices shall be determined by
ASTM E-84 or UL 723 or BS 476. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and
installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction.
2.1 Batt or Blanket Insulation
2.1.1 THERMAL RESISTANCE VALUE (R-VALUE): Batt or blanket insulation for Roof
= R 19 (125mm thick) with foil on one side. Batt insulation shall be Roxul Fibertex.
Roofing Roll by Rockwool Building Materials (Phils.) Ltd.
2.2 Sound Control Batt Wall Insulation
2.2.1 Shall 75 mm thick semi rigid rockwool with a nominal density of 50kg/m3 (3.1lb/ft3) wrap
with polyethylene. Semi rigid insulation shall be Roxul Fibertex Building Insulation by
Rockwool Building Materials (Phils.) Ltd.
2.3 Accessories
2.3.1 Adhesive
As recommended by the insulation Manufacturer.

2.3.2 Duct Tape
As recommended by the insulation Manufacturer.
2.3.3 Welded Wire Mesh: Gauge 20 x 25 x 25mm mesh or as recommended by manufacturer
Page | 247
Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of any projections.
3.2 Installation of Roof Insulation
Apply a continuous insulation with vapor barrier towards outside and laid under purlins,
secured in place with wire mesh to purlins with 1.2 mm (gauge 18) x 20 mm wide flat
bar with self tapping screws spaced at 600 mm. Apply duct tapes at joints or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 Installation of Sound Control Wall Insulation
Apply sound control insulation friction fit in cavity walls and partitions as indicated on
the drawings.
installed with building insulation inclusive of welded wire mesh, accessories and
Building insulation work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
this Item.

NO.
1038 (2) Blanket Insulation, R= 19 with Wiremesh sq.m.

Reinforcement; With Foil on One Side (Rockwool
Insulation) (Location: Roofing)
Page | 248
ITEM 1039 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANELS
1039.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of aluminum
composite panels as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 References
1.2.1 Aluminum Association
AA-C22-A41 Clear Coatings
AA-C22-A44 Two Step Color Coatings
1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials
B-117 Method of Salt Spray (F06) Testing
D-659 Evaluating Degree of Chalking of External Paints
D-1308 Effects of Household Chemicals on Clear and

Pigmented Organic Finishes
1.3 Submittals
Submit complete shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Indicate thickness and
dimension of parts; fastening and anchoring methods; detail and location of joints and
gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movements.
1.3.1 Samples
Two samples each type of panel assembly 152 mm x 152 mm. Submit two samples for
each color or finish selected.
Composite panel manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience.
Fabricator / installer shall be acceptable to Composite Panel manufacturer and field
measurements should be taken prior to completion of shop manufacturing and finishing.
1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Page | 249
Protect finish and edges in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations.

Material shall be stored in accordance with aluminum panel manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.1 Material
Aluminum composite panel is composed of a polyethylene core between two aluminum

sheets, and coated with extra-durable PVDF (flouroresin) resin coating system to ensure
excellent durability of surface finish. The back side of the panel shall be made of
aluminum-coated polyester. Panel size shall be 1200 mm by 2400 mm and thickness shall
be 4 mm with minimum coating thickness of 1.0 mil. Coating shall withstand direct and
reverse impact of 1.5 inch pounds per mil substrate thickness. Color shall be as selected
by the Architect / Engineers from manufacturer’s standard or custom colors. Aluminum
composite panel shall be “Architects Metal System” or approved equal.
3.1 Inspection
Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects
detrimental to work.
3.2 Installation
Erect panels plumb, level and true, Anchor panels securely in place in accordance with
manufacturer’s approved shop drawings. Conform to aluminum composite panel
manufacturer’s instructions for installation of concealed fasteners.
3.3 Adjusting and Cleaning
Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair. Repair panels with minor damage
and clean exposed panels surfaces promptly after completion of installation in accordance
with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturer.
The work done under this Item shall be measured by actual area covered o r installed with
aluminum composite panel inclusive of sealant - in square meters and accepted to the
Page | 250
The area of aluminum composite panel inclusive of sealant - in square meters shall be
paid for at the unit bid or contract unit price which payment shall constitute full
compensation including labor, materials, tools, and incidents necessary to complete this
Item.

NO.
1039 (1) Aluminum Cladding, 4.0mm Thk sq.m.
Page | 251
ITEM 1041 FIBER CEMENT BOARD
1041.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of fiber cement
board as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product data
Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified.
1.2.2 Samples
1.2.2.1 Submit 300 mm x 300 mm for each board, 2 sets of required mock up.
1.2.2.2 Submit miscellaneous product samples such as joint tapes and compounds.
2.1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility
Obtain each type of fiber cement panels and related treatment materials from a single
manufacturer.
1.4.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in original-packages containers or bundles bearing brand name and

identification of manufacturer or supplier.
1.4.2 Handling
Handle fiber cement boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
1.4.3 Storage
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic
and other causes. Neatly stack fiber cement boards flat to prevent sagging.
Page | 252
2.1 Materials
Shall be Fiber Cement Sheets, Auto-cleaved, single faced sheets containing portland
cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber and water. Fiber Cement sheets shall be
manufactured from asbestos-free materials.
2.1.1 6 mm thick fiber cements board, plain or perforated and 10, 12 and 15 mm thick plain
fiber cement board as indicated on the drawings. Perforated fiber cement board shall
be similar to “Hardie Soffit Panels” or approved equivalent.
2.1.2 Composition: Fiber cement board shall be asbestos free, fiber-reinforced cement sheets.
2.1.3 EMC Mass: 14.1 kg/m2 minimum
2.2 Steel Framing and Furring
2.2.1 Steel Framing and Furring: Shall be gauge 24 minimum thicknesses of uncoated metal
galvanized C-shaped or as otherwise indicated.
2.3 Fasteners
2.3.1 Provide fasteners of type, material size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other
properties required for fastening furring and framing members to substrates indicated.
2.3.2 Trim Accessories: Provide metal trims accessories of profile and materials as shown
on the drawings, or as otherwise required by the Architect/or Manufacturer.
2.4 Miscellaneous Framing and Supports
2.4.1 General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated.
2.4.2 Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent
other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel
shapes, plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field
connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
2.4.2.1 Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry. Furnish insert, if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
2.4.2.2 Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors at 600 mm on centers and provide
minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 32 mm wide by 6 mm by 200 mm
long.
Page | 253
2.5 Hanger Rods
2.5.1 Hanger rods shall be 6 mm diameter high carbon steel wire with turnbuckle and
hanging clips. Hanger rods shall be spaced at maximum of 1200 mm on each direction.
2.6.1 General: Provide auxiliary materials for fiber cement board construction, which
comply with reference standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
fiber cement board.
2.6.2 Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended by manufacturer.
2.6.3 Screws: As per recommendation by manufacturer.
2.6.4 Bedding and Topping Cement: As per recommendation by

manufacturer.
2.6.5 Perforated Paper Reinforcing Tape: As per recommendation by manufacturer.
2.6.6 Trim Accessories: Provide galvanized steel edge corner and joint trims as shown or
otherwise required by the Architect/or Manufacturer as standard details.
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine substrates to which fiber cement panel construction attaches or abuts, preset
hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of fiber cement panel construction. Do not proceed with installation until
framing and furring are acceptable for application of fiber cement board and all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 General: Follow specifications of manufacturer.
3.3 Installation of Steel Framing General
3.3.1 General: Follow specification by manufacturer.
3.3.2 Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and
for support of fixture, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar
Page | 254
construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of fiber

cement board manufacturer.
3.3.3 Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by
structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details shown on
drawings.
3.3.4 Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring
members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or
as indicated.
3.4 Installation of Steel Framing
3.4.1 Installation Tolerances: Install each steel furring members so that fastening surface do
not vary more than 3 mm from plane of faces of adjacent framing.
3.4.2 Extended steel furring full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for fiber cement board.
3.5 Application and Finishing of Fiber Cement Panels General
3.5.1 Apply and finish fiber cement panels as per specifications by manufacturer for flush-
jointed applications.
3.5.2 Install fiber cement panels in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints
or avoids them entirely where possible.
3.5.3 Install exposed fiber cement panel with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damages
or damp boards. Bat boards together for slight contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1.5 mm open space between boards. Do not force into place.
3.5.4 Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
intermediate supports are provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges
abut, tapered edges against tapered ends. Do no place tapered edges against cut edges
or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
3.5.5 Attach fiber cement panel for supplementary framing and blocking provided for
additional support at openings and cutouts.
3.5.6 Space fasteners in fiber cement boards in accordance with referenced application and
finishing standard and manufacturer specifications.
3.6 Methods of Fiber Cement Board Application
Page | 255
3.6.1 General: Follow specifications by manufacturer.
3.6.2 Single-layer Application: Install fiber cement panel as follows, and as indicated on the
drawings.
3.6.3 Single-layer fastening Methods: Apply fiber cement panels to

supports as follows:
3.6.3.1 Fasten to steel framing with adhesive and supplementary screws as per
recommendation by manufacturer.
3.7 Installation of Trim Accessories
3.7.1 General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as
required to fasten fiber cement board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to
comply with specification by the manufacturer.
3.7.2 Install corner boards at external corners.
3.7.3 Install metal edge trim whenever edge of fiber cement board would otherwise be
exposed or semi-exposed.
3.7.3.1 Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled.
3.8 Finishing of Fiber Cement Boards
3.8.1 General: Apply to joint treatment at fiber cement panels joints (both directions);
penetrations; fasteners head, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare works
for decoration.
3.8.2 Finish fiber cement panels as per recommendation by manufacturer.
3.9 Protection
3.9.1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to installer that
ensures, fiber cement panel construction being without damage or deterioration at time
of substantial completion.
All fiber cement boards shall be measured in square meters or part thereof for work
actually completed and accepted.
Page | 256
The work quantified and determined as provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid
for at the Contract Unit Price which price constitutes full compensation including labor,
materials, tools and equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

NO.
1041 (1) j Downspout Cladding (9mm Thk Fiber Cement Board sq.m.
Wall on 100mm thk Metal Stud Framing, 1-Face)
1041 (1) l Ficem Cladding (10mm Thk Fiber Cement Board Wall sq.m.
on 100mm thk Metal Stud Framing, 1-Face)
ONE OF THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1003 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

WORKS.
Page | 257
ITEM 1041 GYPSUM BOARD
1041.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the furnishing and supply of materials, including equipment, and
performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of gypsum board as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Catalog Data
Submit catalog information for each type of gypsum board (ordinary and moisture
resistant), fastener, joint treatment materials, adhesive, and metal trim. Clearly mark
data that describe more than one type or item to indicate which type, or item will be
provided.
Submit certificates attesting that the following materials meet the requirements
specified:
a. Each type of gypsum board

b. Fasteners
c. Adhesive
d. Metal or plastic trim
e. Control joints
1.2.3 Sample
Submit sample of each type of gypsum board with proper label or manufacturer’s tag
indicating material descriptions.
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with each bearing the
brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of manufacturer, or supplier.
1.3.2 Handling
Page | 258
Neatly stock gypsum board flat to prevent sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and
surfaces.
1.3.3 Storage
Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary to store
gypsum board outside, store off the ground, properly supported on a level platform, and
protected from direct exposure to rain, sunlight and other extreme weather conditions.
Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.
1.4.1 Temperature
Maintain a uniform temperature of 27 C in the structure for at least 48 hours prior to,
during, and following the application of gypsum board and joint treatment materials, or
the bonding of adhesives.
1.4.2 Exposure to Weather
Protect gypsum board products from direct exposure to rain, sunlight, and other extreme
weather conditions.
2.1 Materials
Gypsum board shall conform to the respective specifications and standards and to the
requirements specified herein. Provide gypsum board manufactured from asbestos free
materials.
2.1.1 Gypsum Ceiling Board:
a. Regular: 1200 mm wide, 12 mm thick as shown in drawing,

tapered edges.
b. Moisture resistant: 1200 mm wide, 12 mm thick, tapered edges
2.1.2 Gypsum Wall Board:
a. Regular: 1200 mm wide, 16 mm thick as shown in drawing,

tapered edges.
b. Moisture resistant: 1200 mm wide, 16 mm thick, tapered edges
Page | 259
2.1.3 Hangers shall be 6 mm diameter rod, high carbon steel wire with turnbuckle and hanging
clips.
2.1.4 Joint Treatment Materials:
2.1.4.1 Embedding Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum board
joints completely compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.4.2 Finishing or Topping Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound.
2.1.4.3 All-purpose Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and finishing

compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.4.4 Joint Tape
Cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or special tape recommended by the

manufacturer.
2.1.5 Screws
Screws shall be Type "G," Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws. Use specially
designed steel screws as recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board for the
screw application of gypsum board to gypsum board or to steel or wood framing.
2.1.6 Corner bead and Edge Trim
Fabricate from corrosive protective coated steel or plastic design for its intended use.
Flanges shall be free or dirt, grease, and other materials that may adversely affect the
bond of joint treatment. Materials shall be pre-finished or job decorated.
3.1 Inspection
3.1.1 Framing and Furring
Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and spacing to provide
a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board. Do not proceed with work until framing
and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board.
Page | 260
3.2 Application of Gypsum Ceiling Board
Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members. Apply gypsum board with
separate boards in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger end joints of adjoining
boards. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints. Use gypsum board of maximum practical
length. Cut out gypsum board as required making neat close joints around openings. In
vertical application of gypsum board, panels shall be of length required to reach full
height of vertical surfaces in one continuous piece. Surfaces of gypsum board and
substrate members may be bonded together with an adhesive, except where prohibited
by fire rating(s). Leave a space approximately 6 mm at bottom gypsum board for
caulking. Type of gypsum board for use in each system specified herein shall be as
indicated.
3.3 Finishing of Gypsum Board
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840. Provide joint, fastener
depression, and corner treatment.
3.4 Caulking
Caulk openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through gypsum board
as specified in Section entitled, "Sealants and Caulking." Apply caulking material with
exposed surface flush with gypsum board.
3.5 Patching
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance, ready to receive
finish as specified.
laid with gypsum boards and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Gypsum board work determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
Item.
Page | 261

NO.
1041 (1) a Gypsum Board for Walls (1-16mm Thk Ordinary Gypsum sq.m.
Board Wall on 100mm thk Metal Stud Framing, 2-Face)
with 75mm Thk Sound Attenuation Blanket
1041 (1) e Gypsum Board for Walls (1-16mm Thk Fire Rated Board sq.m.
Wall on 100mm thk Metal Stud Framing, 1-Face) with
75mm Thk Sound Attenuation Blanket
1041 (1) f Gypsum Board for Walls (1-16mm Thk Fiber Cement sq.m.
Board Wall on 100mm thk Metal Stud Framing, 1-Face)
Page | 262
ITEM 1046 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (NON LOAD BEARING)
1046.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of concrete
masonry units as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2.1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
C 39-86 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
C 91-93 Masonry Cement
C 144-91 1 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
C 270-92a Mortar for Unit Masonry
C 404-92 Aggregates for Masonry Grout
1.2.2 Product Standards Agency (PSA) Publications (Philippines):
PNS 07-92 Specifications for Portland Cement
PNS 16-84 Specifications for Concrete Hollow Blocks
PNS 18-84 Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
PNS 49-86 Specifications for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
SAO 181-73 Industrial Quicklime and Hydrated Lime
1.3 Definitions
1.3.1 Grout Lift and Grout Pour: A grout lift is the layer of grout placed in a single continuous
operation. A grout pour is the entire height of grout fill placed in one day and is composed
of a number of successively placed grout lifts.
Page | 263
1.3.2 Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Hollow concrete masonry units reinforced vertically
and horizontally with steel bars located within cells.
Handle, store and protect masonry units to avoid chipping, breakage or contact with the
soil. Keep steel reinforcing bars free of rust and loose scale. Reject rusted steel
reinforcing bars. Deliver cement and lime in unbroken bags, barrels, or other sealed
containers. Keep cementitious materials dry. Store and handle cement to prevent the
inclusion of foreign materials. Store aggregates in a manner to avoid contamination or
segregation. Plainly mark and label containers with the manufacturer's names and brands.
2.1 Concrete Masonry Units
2.1.1 Aggregates: PNS 18
2.1.2 Linear Drying Shrinkage: Not to exceed 0.065 percent when tested in accordance
with ASTM 426.
2.1.3 Kinds and Shapes: In addition to the requirements specified, concrete masonry units
of the various kinds shall conform to PNS 16, Type II for 200 mm thick, 150 mm
thick and for 100 mm thick. Include closer, jamb, lintel and bond beam units and
special shapes and sizes to complete the work as indicated.
2.2 Centering Device
Provide centering clips that prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during the course of
construction.
2.3 Deformed Reinforcing Bars
PNS 49, Grade 275 (40,000 psi).
2.4 Materials for Mortar and Grout
2.4.1 Admixtures: May be used in mortar or grout provided that the admixture does not
adversely affect bond or compressive strength of mortar or grout.
2.4.2 Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except that not less than 3 percent nor more than
15 percent shall pass the No. 100 sieve. Aggregate used in mortar for joint 6 mm or less
shall have 100 percent passing the No. 8 sieve with 10 percent being retained on the No.
16 sieve.
Page | 264
2.4.3 Aggregate for Grout:
2.4.3.1 Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 404, Size No. 2 or ASTM C 144.
2.4.3.2 Pea Gravel: ASTM C 404, except that 100 percent shall pass the 9 mm screen and not
more than 5 percent shall pass the No. 8 sieve.
2.4.3.3 Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 404, size No. 8.
2.4.4 Portland Cement: PNS 07, Type I.
2.4.5 Lime Putty: Slaked according to manufacturer's instructions.
2.4.5.1 Hydrated Lime: SAO 181.
2.4.5.2 Pulverized Quicklime: SAO 181 except 100 percent shall pass the No. 20 sieve and
90 percent shall pass the No. 50 sieve.
2.4.5.3 Lime Paste: Lime paste shall be made with pulverized quicklime or hydrated lime.
Hydrated lime processed by the steam method shall be allowed to soak not less than 24
hours. Quicklime and other hydrated lime shall be allowed to soak not less than 72 hours.
In lieu of hydrated lime paste for use in mortar, the hydrated lime may be added in the dry
form.
2.4.6 Water: Potable.
2.5 Mortar Mixes
2.5.1 Proportions: Type M in accordance with the proportion specifications of ASTM C 270.
The mortar shall have a flow, after 11 minutes, of 75 percent or more when tested for
water retention in accordance with ASTM C 91 except mortar shall be mixed to an initial
flow of 105 to 115 percent.
2.6 Grout Mixtures
2.6.1 Proportions: Mix in laboratory established proportions to in a compressive strength at 28

days of not less than 10.3 MPa (1500 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 91 for
fine aggregate and ASTM C 39 for grout containing coarse aggregate. Grout shall be
classified as fine and low lift types as specified below and shall be used subject to the
limitations of Table I herein.
2.6.1.1 Fine Grout: Portland cement, fine aggregate and sufficient water to obtain a pouring
consistency without segregation of the constituents. Slump shall be approximately 125
mm.
Page | 265
2.6.1.2 Low Lift Grout: Portland cement, lime paste or hydrated lime, fine aggregate and coarse
aggregate, and sufficient water to obtain a pouring consistency without segregation of the
constituents. Slump shall be between 200 and 250 mm Maximum sizes of coarse
aggregate for grout in accordance with Table I herein.
2.7 Source Quality Control
Prior to delivery of masonry units to the site, select by random sampling nine individual
whole units from the units proposed for use. Select units free from cracks or other
structural defects. Test in accordance with PNS 16.
3.1 Preparation
3.1.1 Protection
a. Forms and Shores: Where required, construct forms to the shapes, lines, and
dimensions of the members indicated. Construct forms sufficiently rigid to
prevent deflections which may result in cracking or other damage to the
supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and
grout. Do not remove supporting forms or shores until the supported masonry
has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight and construction loads to
which it may be subjected. In no case shall supporting forms or shores be
removed in less than 10 days. Wait at least 16 hours after grouting masonry
walls after applying uniform loads and wait an additional 48 hours before
applying concentrated loads.
b. Wall Bracing: Brace walls against wind and other forces during construction.
Allow sufficient time between lifts to prevent cracking of face shells of hollow
masonry units. If blowouts, misalignment, or cracking of face-shells should occur
during construction, tear down and rebuild the wall at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.1.2 Surface Preparation: Clean laitance, dust, dirt, oil, organic matter or foreign materials
from concrete surface upon which reinforced masonry is to be placed. Use sandblasting,
if necessary, to remove laitance from pores and expose to the aggregate.
3.2 Laying Masonry Units
3.2.1 Wet Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units. Do not lay units having a film
of water on the surface.
3.2.2 Embedded Items: Build in wall plugs, accessories, flashings pipe sleeves and other items
required being built-in as the masonry works progresses. Fill cells receiving anchor bolts
Page | 266
and cells of the first course below bearing plates with mortar or grout. Fill spaces around
metal doorframes and other built-in items with mortar. Point openings around flush-
mounted electrical outlet boxes in wet locations, including the flush joint above the box
with mortar. Do not embed aluminum items.
3.2.3 Bond Beams and Lintels: Install bond units, reinforced as indicated, filled with grout.
Install open bottom type bond beam units over cells to be filled. Place wire mesh or small
mesh metal lath under open bond beam units if used over cells are not to be filled.
3.2.4 Unfinished Work: Step back-unfinished work for joining with new work. Remove loose
mortar and thoroughly clean the exposed joints before laying new work.
3.2.5 Placing Units: Lay hollow masonry units so as to preserve the vertical continuity of cells
filled with grout. The minimum clear horizontal dimensions of vertical cores shall be 50
mm by 75 mm. Masonry bond units at corners. Anchor intersections by reinforcing bars
as indicated. Adjust each unit to its final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. If
any unit is disturbed after mortar has stiffened, remove and relay in fresh mortar. Keep
chases, raked out joints, and spaces to be grouted, free from mortar and other debris.
3.2.6 Bond Pattern: Lay masonry units in running bond.
3.2.7 Cutting and Fitting: Wherever possible, use full units of the proper size in lieu of cut
units. Use power masonry saws for cutting and fitting. Concrete -masonry units shall
be wet cut. Make cut edges clean, true and sharp. Make openings carefully so that
wall plates cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation will completely
conceal the openings and will be aligned at the bottom with the masonry joints. Cut
webs of hollow masonry units to the minimum required for proper installation. Provide
reinforced masonry lintels, above openings over 300 mm wide for pipes, ducts and
cables trays unless steel sleeves are used.
3.2.8 Mortar Joints: Spread bed joints with mortar for the full thickness of the face shells.
Where only cells containing reinforcement are to be grouted, spread cross webs around
such cell with mortar to prevent leakage of grout. Butter head joints for full thickness of
the face shell and place the units. Avoid fins of mortar that protrude into cells to be
grouted.
3.2.9 Jointing: Tool joints when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Tool horizontal joints first.
Brush joints to remove loose and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as follows:
3.2.9.1 Flush Joints: Flush cut joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints above electrical
outlet boxes in wet areas. Make flush cut joints by cutting off the mortar flush with the
face of the wall.
3.2.9.2 Tooled Joints: Tool joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces slightly
concave. Use a jointer of sufficient length to obtain a straight and true mortar joints.
Page | 267
3.2.10 Joint Width: 9 mm wide.
3.3 Placing Reinforcement Steel
Prior to placing grout, clean, reinforcement of loose, flaky rust, scale, grease, mortar,
grout, or other coating, which might destroy or reduce its bond with the grout. Details of
reinforcement shall be in conformance with ACI 315. Do not bend or straighten
reinforcing in a manner injurious to the steel. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not
shown on the drawings. Placement of reinforcement shall be inspected and approved prior
to placing grout.
3.3.1 Positioning Bars: Position vertical bars accurately at the centerline of the wall. Maintain
a minimum clearance between the bars and masonry units of 12 mm and between parallel
bars of one diameter of the reinforcement. Hold vertical reinforcing in place using metal
support, centering clips, spacers, ties or caging devices located near the ends of each bar
and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192 diameters of the reinforcement.
3.3.2 Splices: Locate splices only as indicated. Stagger splices in adjacent bars at least 600
mm. Lap bars a minimum of 40 diameters of the reinforcement or 600 mm whichever is
greater. Welded or mechanical connections shall develop the full strength of the
reinforcement.
3.4 Placing of Grout
Use a hand bucket, concrete hopper or grout pump. Place grout in final position within 1-
½ hours after mixing. Where grouting is discontinued for more than one hour, stop the
grout 25-mm below the top of a course to form a key at pour points. Place grout to
completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates.
3.4.1 Low Lift Grout Method: Place grout as masonry is erected at a rate that will not cause
displacement of the masonry due to hydrostatic pressure of the grout. If mortar has been
allowed to set prior to grouting, remove fins protruding more than 12 mm into the grout
space. Rod grout or puddle grout during placement using a long 25-mm by 50-mm wood
stick or a mechanical vibrator.
3.5 Tolerance
Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with course level. Keep bond patterns plumb throughout.
3.6.1 Grout: Employ a qualified testing laboratory to proportion and test grout. Do not change
laboratory established proportions or use materials with different physical or chemical
Page | 268
characteristics in grout for the work unless additional evidence is furnished that the grout
meets the specified requirements.
3.7 Cleaning
After mortar joints have attained their initial set but prior to hardening, completely remove
mortar and grout daubs or splashing from exposed masonry surfaces. Before completion
of the work, make out defects in joints in exposed masonry surfaces. Before completion
of the work, make out defects in joints in exposed masonry surfaces fill with mortar and
tool to match existing joints. Immediately after grout work is completed remove scum
and stairs which have percolated through the masonry using a high pressure steam of water
and a stiff fiber bristled brush. Do not use metal tools or metal brushes for cleaning. Dry
brush exposed concrete masonry unit surfaces at the end of work each day.
actually installed with concrete masonry unit and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Concrete masonry unit work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall
be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full

NO.
1046 (2) a.1 CHB Non Load Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel), sq.m.
100mm thk
1046 (2) a.2 CHB Non Load Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel), sq.m.
150mm thk.
Page | 269
ITEM 1046 LIGHTWEIGHT WALL PANEL SYSTEM
1046.1 DESCRIPTION
1.3 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of lightweight
wall panel system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2.1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C-39 / C-39 M-01: Test Method of Compressive Strength of the Wall
Panel.
ASTM E-119: Test Method for Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials.
ASTM C-518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission

Properties by means of Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
ASTM E-90: Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
1.3.1 General: Provide manufactured lightweight wall panel assemblies complying with
performance requirements indicated and capable of exposure to weather without failure
or infiltration of water into the building interior.
1.3.2 Fire Resistance: Provide manufactured wall panel assemblies with a fire resistance
performance rating of two (2) hours according to ASTM E-119 (2000).
1.3.3 Structural Performance: Provide manufactured wall panel assemblies capable of

withstanding design wind loads indicated under in-service condition, based on testing
manufacturer’s standard units.
1.4 Submittals
Page | 270
1.4.1 Product Data: Include manufacturer’s product specifications, standard details, certified
product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes
for total panel assemblies.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Show connection details of panels, joints, top and bottom fixings, panel
profile, anchorage and special details.
1.4.3 Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of wall panels with performance and other
requirements based on testing conducted by an independent testing agency with
experience and capabilities indicated.
1.4.4 Sample: Submit sample section showing the core construction.
1.5.1 Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall panels to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
1.5.2 Stack materials on platforms or pallets with adequate support both on the middle and on
ends, maximum of nine panels per pallet. Do not store panels in contact with other
materials that might cause breakage, or other surface damage.
1.6 Design Loading and Testing
1.6.1 All wall panels shall be designed with compressive strength not less than 35kg/sq.cm.
(500 psi)
1.6.2 Reports on test result carried out in a laboratory of recognized testing center, together
with design calculations shall be submitted for approval.
2.1 Manufacturer
2.1.1 Lightweight wall panels shall be “FASTWALL,” manufactured by Fast Wall System
Philippines, Inc. or approved equal.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 Lightweight wall panel is a composite wall system made of polystyrene beads mixed with
cement and admixtures sandwiched between two cement boards.
2.2.2 Sizes: Thickness 150 mm, Width 600 mm, Lengths 2400 mm / 2700 mm / 3000 mm.
Skin shall be 3.2 mm thick cement board on both faces.
Page | 271
2.2.3 Reinforcement shall be 10 mm diameter bars embedded as required.
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Examine Substrate Condition: Check levelness for compliance with requirements
indicated for conditions affecting performance of wall panels. Provide shim/mortar if
necessary to attain levelness.
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Track System: Install metal tracks using drop-in, resin anchors, bolts or self-taping
screw. Ensure that top and bottom tracks are on the same level.
3.2.2 Secondary Structural Support: Install angle bars, girts, and other secondary structural
support members and anchorage as required for receiving the wall panels.
3.3 Panel Installation
3.3.1 General: Comply with panel manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations
for installation, as applicable to project conditions.
3.3.2 Track system: Install wall panels and check for plumbness of the first panel. Anchor the
panel and other components of the work securely in place, in compliance with the loading
requirements. Install succeeding panels using concrete/structural epoxy/adhesive on
horizontal joints, occasionally checking the verticality of the panels.
3.3.3 Anchors and Fastenings: Make ample provisions for securing panel units to each other,
to masonry, and to other adjoining construction. Anchors and fastening shall be with
nuts for easy demounting of panels.
3.3.4 Accessories: Install components required for a complete wall assembly including joint
sealer, mesh tape, and sealant where indicated and where required for weatherproof
performance.
3.3.5 Joint Sealer: Apply sealant continuously between joints as necessary for waterproofing
as indicated in Section 07900 Sealants and Caulking. Handle and apply sealant and
back-up according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions.
actually installed with lightweight wall panel system and accepted to the satisfaction
of the Architect.
Page | 272
Lightweight wall panel system work is determined and provided in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment

NO.
1046 (2) a.4 Precast Wall Panel, 150mm thk. sq.m.
Page | 273
ITEM 1047 DRAPERY AND CURTAIN HARDWARE
1047.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply and furnishing of materials, including equipment,
and performing labor, necessary for the complete and proper installation of drapery
and curtain hardware as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Submit drawing for curtain and showing sizes, location, metal
gauges, installation details, and other details for construction.
1.2.2 Submit catalog cuts and color samples for approval of the Architect.
Schedule the delivery of materials such that it is near time of installation. Materials
shall be protected against damage during delivery and storage at the site.
1.4 Contractor’s Responsibility
All materials and equipment shall be carefully checked to determine the portions
which must be provided to complete the installation.
2.1 Manufacturer
Acceptable manufacturer shall be “Greatyear Industries, Corporation”.
2.2 Material
2.2.1 Drapery and curtain hardware shall be stainless steel.
2.2.2 Features:
a. Suitable weighty drapes
b. Twin-wheeled carries with ball bearing with a high degree of accuracy to

insure the most smooth running of drapes.
Page | 274
c. Drapes: Vinyl coated fabric as approved by the Architect.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Curtain Rod: Install curtain rod, drapes and its accessories on the locations and
heights indicated on the drawings. Surfaces or areas damaged during the installation
of accessories shall be repaired or rectified.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in per unit actually installed
with drapery and curtain hardware and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Drapery and curtain hardware are determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1047 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page | 275
ITEM 1047 FLAGPOLES
1047.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope

equipment, and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation
of flagpoles as shown on the drawings and as specified herein
1.2 System Description
Flagpole shall be dimensional uniform conical taper, seamless tube flag pole.
1.3 Submittals
a. Shop Drawings: Flagpole, including base and finial ball, showing

construction and installation.
b. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Flagpole
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation
only.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167-96 Stainless and Heat-resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet and Strip
B209-96 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy-Sheet and Plate
B241/B241M-96 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and

Seamless Extruded Tube
2.1 Materials
a. Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B241, alloy 6063 - T6.
b. Aluminum, Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy ll00.
Page | 276
c. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Class 302 or 304.
2.2 Fabrication
2.2.1 Fabricate flagpole of seamless extruded aluminum tube, uniform conical taper of
approximately 1 in 70 (one inch in every 6 feet). Taper shall not exceed 50 percent
of outside diameter of pole. When flagpoles are shipped in more than one section,
provide self-aligning sleeves for field joint.
2.2.2 Base
Base shall be aluminum plate.
2.2.3 Finial Ball
2 mm (0.0747 inch) thick spun aluminum sphere, with seams of ball welded flush
and watertight. Mount ball on threaded rod to fit truck. Diameter of ball shall be
approximately same as pole butt diameter.
2.2.4 Truck
Equip pole with extra heavy, revolving, non-fouling, ball bearing type truck with
cast aluminum body. Fit truck with two cast aluminum, nylon bushed sheaves on
stainless steel axles.
2.2.5 Halyards
Two sets of 9 mm (3/8-inch) diameter, nylon braided rope having not less than two
bronze swivel snaps for each halyard.
2.2.6 Cleats
Two aluminum cleats of 230 mm (nine inch) shall be minimum length. Secure cleats
to pole with two 9 mm (3/8-inch) flat head aluminum machine screws.
2.3 Finish: Finish exposed surfaces of flagpoles.
a. Flagpole shaft: Satin brushed aluminum, then heavily waxed.
b. Finial ball: Gold anodized aluminum, then heavily waxed.
c. Base and cleats: Finish matching flagpole.
Page | 277
d. Stainless Steel (base): As recommended by flagpole manufacturer.
3.1 Installation
Set flagpoles in concrete base. Provide galvanized, corrugated steel sleeve or tube
of length shown welded to steel base plates for installation in concrete. Wrap top
of sleeve with two layers of asphalt felt for distance of 600 mm (2 feet) down. Fill
space between pole and metal sleeve to within two inches of top with fine dry sand
and fill balance of space with waterproof compound as shown.
3.2 Lightning Rod
Weld lightning ground rod of 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter galvanized steel to base

plate at bottom of sleeve or tube, and to steel support plate at grade.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured in per unit actually installed
with flagpoles and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Flagpoles are determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for based
at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full compensation for
this Item.
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1047 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page | 278
ITEM 1047 GARBAGE CHUTE
1047.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope

equipment, and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation
of garbage chute as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings for Architect’s approval. Show
complete information concerning fabrication installation, joint details, fastenings
and other information requested by the Architect. Minor variation in details for the
purpose of improving fabrication and installation procedures, but not affecting the
exterior design concept or structural stability will be given consideration if
submitted.
1.3 Measurements and Coordination
1.3.1 Obtain measurements for all work required to be accurately fitted at the job and
not from the drawings. The Contractor will be responsible for the accuracy of all
such measurements and the precise fitting and assembly of the finish products.
Coordinate the work with that of all other trades to prevent interference.
1.4.1 General: Provide manufactured garbage chute assemblies complying with

performance requirements indicated.
1.4.2 Provide manufactured garbage chute to comply with the latest NFPA 82 and the
National Building Code of the Philippines. Full factory assembled with all vertical
seams lapped and welded.
1.4.3 The adjustable intake door and frame shall be securely fastened to the intake throat.
2.1 Materials
Garbage chute shall be fabricated from 90 mm thick steel angle frame and a high
grade 1.6 thick mm stainless steel 304 finish conforming to ASTM Standard 240.
The garbage chute shall be securely welded to 2 mm outer and inner steel body
Page | 279
plate. The intake door shall be self closing, with positive latching system. The front
shall be fabricated of polished stainless steel with matt steel backs. Integral polish
stainless steel trim, with top side embossed, designating the use of the chute. Pivot
hinge shall be welded to the door frame. The garbage chute shall be equipped with
locking device of key lock type and “C” handle latching assembly. Garbage chute
size shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.1 Miscellaneous: Miscellaneous materials or accessories not listed above shall be

provided as specified hereinafter the various items of work and/or indicated on the
drawings, or in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
3.1 Workmanship
3.1.1 Make all works well formed to shape and size shown and assemble as detailed. All
items shall be of the materials, design, shape, sizes and thickness shown or called
for on the drawings and herein specified. Methods of fabrication and assembly
however, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be of first quality craftsmanship
and at the discretion of the contractors whose responsibility shall be to guarantee
satisfactory performance as herein specified.
3.2 Fabrication
Garbage chute shall be fabricated and installed as directed by the manufacturer.
3.3 Protection
All finished works shall be protected until turnover to the owner.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured per unit actually installed with
garbage chute and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Garbage chute is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
this Item.
Page | 280

NO.
1047 (11) i Stainless Steel Garbage Chute (Location: Building 18) l.s.
Page | 281
ITEM 1047 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1047.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope

of miscellaneous metal works as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
The work includes but not limited to the following:
a. Concrete Topping Reinforcement
b. Grilles
c. Aluminum Nosing
d. Brass Nosing
e. Aluminum Tubular Slats
f. Steel Tubular Slats
g. Protection Bollard
h. Steel Caged Ladder
i. Steel Grating Platform
See drawings for sizes, details and location of work required.
1.2 Submittal
1.2.1 Shop Drawings
Show details of fabrication and installation for each type and material as required
including plans, elevations, sections, joint details, fastenings and other necessary
information.
Minor variation in details for the purpose of improving fabrication and installation
procedures, but not affecting the exterior design concept or structural stability will
be given consideration if submitted.
Page | 282
1.2.3 Samples
Prepare samples of each type of metal works. Where finish involves normal color
and texture variations, include sample sets composed of two or more units showing
limits of such variations expected in completed works.
1.2.3.1 Include sample of typical welded connection.
1.3 Measurement and Coordination

Obtain measurements for all work required to be accurately fitted at the job and not
from the drawings. The Contractor will be responsible for the accuracy of all such
measurements and the precise fitting and assembly of the finish products.
Coordinate the work with that of all other trades to prevent interference. Verify
conditions at the job before fabrication.
1.4 Storage
1.4.1 Store materials in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and masonry,
protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or
polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
blemishes.
2.1.2 Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.3 Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
2.1.4 Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
2.1.5 Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial
steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is
required by design loads, exposed.
2.1.6 Fastenings: Commercial types, except where special types are shown or required.
Fastenings for all exterior work shall be non-ferrous, unless otherwise shown.
Page | 283
Fastenings for steel, aluminum, and for all other interior work, where exposed, shall
match the fastened metal.
2.1.7 Miscellaneous: Miscellaneous materials or accessories not listed above shall be

provided as specified hereinafter the various items of work and/or indicated on the
drawings, or in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
2.2 Metal Works
2.2.1 Concrete Topping Reinforcement: Shall be 50 mm x 50 mm x 3 mm diameter

uncoated welded wires mesh.
2.2.2 Grilles: Shall be 50 mm x 50 mm x 2 mm hot dipped galvanized tubular steel.
2.2.3 Aluminum Nosing with Carborandum Strip: Provide brass nosing on concrete stoop
as indicated on the drawings. Aluminum nosing shall be 60mm by 20mm with a
nominal thickness of 3 mm. Aluminum nosing shall be fixed using exposed
countersunk stainless screws spaced at 250mm or as recommended by
manufacturer.
2.2.4 Aluminum Tubular Slats: Shall be 50 mm x 50 mm x 2.5 mm wall thickness in

powder coated finish as indicated on the drawings.
2.2.4 Steel Tubular Slats: Shall be 50 mm x 50 mm x gauge 18 wall thickness in powder

coated finish as indicated on the drawings.
2.2.5 Steel Caged Ladder: Ladder rung shall be 20 mm diameter plain round bar. All
other steel caged ladder components shall comply with the material requirements
specified and as indicated on the drawings.
2.2.6 Steel Grating Platform: Shall be hot dip galvanized steel grating similar to
“Webgrate WA Series 1 by Webforge).
2.1.7 Brass Stair Nosing: Provide brass nosing on stairs as indicated on the drawings.
Brass nosing shall be 60 mm by 20 mm with a nominal thickness of 2.5 mm. Brass
nosing shall be fixed using exposed countersunk brass screws spaced at 250 mm
or as recommended by manufacturer.
3.1 Workmanship
3.1.1 Make all works well formed to shape and size shown and assemble as detailed. All
Page | 284
and at the discretion of the Contractors whose responsibility shall be to guarantee
3.1.2 Cut, shear and punch to produce clean, true lines and surfaces with burrs removed.
3.1.3 Weld or bolt connections as indicated. Use countersunk screws in recessed

work where possible. Make all details of assembly strong with sufficient stiffness.
Form joints exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide all work proper clearances. Fabricate and install in a manner to provide for
expansion and contraction but will insure rigidity and provide close fitting of
sections.
3.1.4 Fabricate and install as directed by the manufacturer.
3.1.5 Provide a protective clear coating which is resistant to alkaline, mortar

and plaster to be applied to aluminum sections after fabrication.
3.2 Protection
Protect all finished work until turnover to the Owner.
Miscellaneous metals shall be measured based on actual in-place installed as shown

The actual installed including all miscellaneous metals and ready for service shall be
the basis for payment based on the Contract unit bid price.

NO.
1047 METAL STRUCTURE
1047 (10) g Flagpole (152mmø (6") Pole Butt, 89mm (3 1/2") Pole set
Top, Satin Brushed Aluminum Tapered Pipe Post with
229mm (9") Cast Alum Cleats w/ 2-8mm (5/16") Flat
Head Alum Machine Screws, Cast Alum Cap Style
Stationary Pully Truck and 3"ø Alum Ball Top Ornament
Page | 285
on 1/2"ø Rod Screws) Height=6500mm (Location:

Ground Floor, Building 1)
1047 (10) g.1 Flagpole (152mmø (6") Pole Butt, 89mm (3 1/2") Pole set
Top, Satin Brushed Aluminum Tapered Pipe Post with
229mm (9") Cast Alum Cleats w/ 2-8mm (5/16") Flat
Head Alum Machine Screws, Cast Alum Cap Style
Stationary Pully Truck and 3"ø Alum Ball Top Ornament
on 1/2"ø Rod Screws) Height=3100mm (Location: Third
Floor, Building 1)
1047 (11) a Metal Structures, Steel Caged Ladder; includes 16mm

Ø Steel Rung; 50 x 10mm Thk Side Rail; 50 x 10mm thk
Steel Caged Vertical, 50 x 10mm Thk Steel Hoops, and
other accessories to complete item; Epoxy Paint Finish;
Height= 5400mm (Location: Building 1)
1047 (11) b Metal Structures, ACCU Enclosure and Access Door: l.m.
includes 150 x 150mm Aluminum Tubular Post, 50 x
50mm Horizontal Aluminum Tubular, Powder Coated
Finish, all fastening accessories needed to complete
Work. Height = 1000mm. (Location: Second Floor Roof
Deck, Building 1)
1047 (11) c Metal Structures, Protection Bollard: Includes 2-100mm set

Ø Steel Pipe Post, Concrete poured ; 2- 75mm Ø Steel
Pipe Rail w/ Retro-Reflective Paint Stirps (Yellow and
Black), Painted Alternately @ Every 100mm, and other
accessories to complete item; Size= 500mm L x
1000mm H. (Location: Firetruck Parking, Building 11)
1047 (11) d Metal Structures,Trellis: Includes 50 x 100mm x 3mm l.s.

thk Steel Tubular spaced @ 300mm o.c. Painted Finish;
Width =1150mm. (Location: Building 12)
1047 (11) e Metal Structures,Trellis: Includes 50 x 100mm x 3mm l.s.

thk Steel Tubular spaced @ 1200mm o.c. Painted
Finish; Width =3275mm. (Location: Building 12)
1047 (11) f Metal Structures, Tubular Steel Grilles, U-Shaped: 50 x set

50mm Tubular Steel Vertical Post, 50 x 50mm Tubular
Steel Grilles and other attachment accessories to
complete item. Size= 7100mm L x 900-1200mm W x
900mm H. (Location: Balcony, All Units @ Ground
Floor, Bldg 18)
1047 (11) g Metal Structures, Service Access Ladder: 16mm Ø

Ladder Rung, Hot Dipped Galvanized Finish, and other
Page | 286
attachment accessories to complete item. Height =

3100mm. (Location: Elevator Pit, Bldg 18)
1047 (11) h Metal Structures, Decorative Metal Slats (Location: l.s.

Building 17B)
1047 (11) j 50 x 50 x 6 mm Steel Grating Platforms, Painted Finish. sq.m.

(Location: Laundry Area, 2nd Flr to 5th flr, Building 18)
1047 (11) n Metal Structures, Brass Nosing l.m.
1047 (11) o Metal Structures, Aluminum Nosing with Carborundrum l.m.

Strip
Page | 287
ITEM 1047 SUNSHADE SCREEN SYSTEM
1047.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of sunshade
screen system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Indicate fasteners, installation methods and for each mounting
condition.
1.2.2 Manufacturer’s Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature indicating

materials, finishes, construction and installation instructions and data verifying that
the product meets the specified requirements. Include manufacturer’s
recommendations for maintenance and cleaning.
Deliver product to project site in manufacturer’s original packaging. Handle

carefully and store to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating mechanism.
1.4 System Description
Sunshade screen system consists of sturdy tubular steel panels. The panels are used
to achieve a crisp sun screen or facade and result in an aesthetically pleasing overall
appearance.
2.1 Materials
Sunshade screen panels are formed from 50 mm by 50 mm x 4 mm thick hot dipped

galvanized tubular steel painted finish
3.1 Inspection
Page | 288
Verify that the work in which the sunshade screen will be installed is free of
conditions that interfere with sunshade screen installations. Begin sunshade screen
installation only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 Workmanship
3.2.1. Make all works well formed to shape and size shown and assemble as detailed. All
and at the discretion of the Contractors whose responsibility shall be to guarantee
3.2.2 Cut, shear and punch to produce clean, true lines and surfaces with burrs removed.
3.2.3 Weld or bolt connections as indicated. Use countersunk screws in recessed work
where possible. Make all details of assembly strong with sufficient stiffness.
Provide all work proper clearances. Fabricate and install in a manner to provide for
expansion and contraction but will insure rigidity and provide close fitting of
sections.
3.2.4 Fabricate and install as directed by the manufacturer.
3.2.5 Provide a protective clear coating which is resistant to alkaline, mortar and plaster
to be applied to aluminum sections after fabrication.
3.3 Protection
3.2.1 Protect all finished work until turnover to the Owner.
actually installed with sunshade screen system and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Sunshade screen system is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
paid for based at the unit bid price which price and payment constitute full
Page | 289
THIS ITEM IS INCLUDED IN ITEM 1047 MISCELLANEOUS METALS,

UNDER METAL STRUCTURE.
Page | 290
ITEM 1051 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
1051.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope

of handrails and railings as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittal
1.2.1 Product Data
Manufacturer’s technical data for products and processed used in handrails and
railing systems, including finishes and grout
1.2.2 Shop Drawings
Show details of fabrication and installation for each type and material of handrail
and railing system required including plans, elevations, sections, profiles of rails,
fittings, connections, and anchors.
1.2.3 Samples
Prepare samples of each type of metal handrails and automotive paint finish as
required on galvanized steel pipes. Where finish involves normal color and texture
variations, include sample sets composed of two or more units showing limits of
such variations expected in completed works.
1.2.3.1 Include 150 mm long samples of each distinctly different railing member including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. Include samples of fittings and brackets if
requested by Architect.
1.2.3.2 Include sample of typical welded connection.
1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility
Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single
manufacturer.
1.4 Storage
Page | 291
1.4.1 Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured
concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with
waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation
inside the covering.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 General
Comply with standards indicated for forms and types of metals indicated or required
for handrail and railing system components.
Stainless Steel Pipe Railing: Shall be 38 mm diameter stainless steel pipe type 304
or as indicated on the drawings.
Galvanized Steel Tubular Railing: Shall be 38 or 50 mm square by 4 mm thick

hot dipped galvanized tubular or as indicated on the drawings.
Galvanized Steel Pipe Railing: Shall be 38 mm hot dipped galvanized steel pipe
schedule 40 or as indicated on the drawings
Flat Bar Railing: Shall be 38 mm x 10 mm thick flat bar painted finish or as

indicated on the drawings.
2.2.1 Non-shrink Nonmetallic Epoxy Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining,

non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD C621. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of
type specified in this section.
2.2.2 Welding Electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying

with applicable AWS Specifications, and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
2.3 Fasteners
Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
2.3.1 Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components
and for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.
Page | 292
2.3.2 Provide Philips flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4 Fabrication
2.4.1 General
Fabricate handrails and railing systems to design, dimensions and details shown.
Provide handrail and railing members in sizes and profiles indicated, with supporting
posts and brackets or size and spacing shown, but not less than required to comply with
requirements indicated for structural performance.
2.4.2 Shop Assembly
Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
2.4.3 Welded Connections
Fabricate handrails and railing systems of materials indicated below for

interconnections of members of welding. Use welding method, which is appropriate
for metal and finish, indicated and develops strength required to comply with structural
performance criteria. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush, and blended to
match adjoining surfaces.
2.4.4 Form changes in direction of railing members by bending members by metering, or as

indicated on the drawing, as approved by the Interior Designer.
2.4.5 Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing
systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices, which are capable
of withstanding loading imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate
anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.4.5.1 For railing posts set in concrete provide pre-chiseled openings and insert posts as
indicated on drawings. Fill opening with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
2.5 Metal Finishes, General
2.5.1 Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations and
designations of finishes, except as otherwise indicated.
3.1 Preparation
Page | 293
3.1.1 Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete as
masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.1.2 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication.
3.2 Installation, General
3.2.1 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
3.2.2 Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and railing
systems. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true,
and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.
3.2.3 Field Welding
Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded metal-
arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds made, and for methods used in
correcting welding work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded
joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent rail surfaces.
3.2.4 Prior to anchoring, adjust handrails and railing systems to ensure matching alignment
at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by
design loading.
3.3 Anchoring Posts
3.3.1 Concrete-Anchored Posts: Provide chiseled opening on concrete base as indicated on

the drawings to receive railing posts and required anchoring system. Clean holes of all
loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-
shrink, non-metallic epoxy grout, mixed and placed t comply with grout manufacturer’s
directions.
3.4 Railing Connections
3.4.1 Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contract or
use manufacturer’s standard fittings designed for this purpose.
3.5 Anchoring Railing Ends
3.5.1 Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with manufacturer’s standard fittings using
concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Page | 294
3.5.2 Anchor Railing Ends to Concrete or Masonry, use drilled-in expansion shields and
concealed hanger bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 Protection
3.6.1 Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction
period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer.
Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6.2 Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no
evidence remains of correction work. Return items which cannot be refinished in the
field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units
as required.
All works performed under this section shall be measured in linear meters of railings
installed and accepted satisfactory by the Architect.
The actual length in linear meters, or number of Quantities shall be the basis of payment
based on the unit bid or contract unit price.

NO.
1051 (3) a.1 Floor Mounted Wooden Railings, 38 x 75mm Hardwood l.m.
KD Top Handrail, Varnish Finish, 5-38 x 6mm thk Flat Bar
Sub Rail, 10 x 50mm Post, Painted Finish, all fastening
accessories needed to complete work; H= 900mm
(Location: Main Stair, Building 18)
1051 (3) a.2 Floor Mounted Wooden Railings, 38 x 75mm Hardwood l.m.
(Location: Lounge, Building 18)
1051 (3) a.3 Wall Mounted Wooden Railings, 38 x 75mm Hardwood l.m.
KD Top Handrail, Varnish Finish, Metal Bracket and
9.5MB with Expansion Shield, all fastening accessories
Page | 295
needed to complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm

1051 (3) b.1 Floor Mounted Wooden Railings, 38 x 75mm Hardwood l.m.
1051 (5) w.1 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
2-38mm Ø Sub-railing; 38mm Ø Pipe Post, Stainless
Steel Escutcheon, all fastening accessories needed to
complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm (Location:
Bunker Stair B102 to 104 , Building 1)
1051 (5) w.2 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
Top Rail with 2-38mm Ø Sub-railing; 38mm Ø Pipe Post,
Stainless Steel Escutcheon, all fastening accessories
needed to complete work; H=900mm (Location: Genset
Stair, Building 1)
complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm (Location:Fire
Exit Stair 1 , Building 1)
needed to complete work; H=900mm (Location: Main
Entry and Ramp, Building 1)
Page | 296

needed to complete work; H=900mm (Location: Entry
Steps 1,2,3 and 4, Building 1)
1051 (5) x.1 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: Stair
1 & 2 , Building 11)
1051 (5) y.1 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 50mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
4-10 x 38mm Flat Bar Sub Railing; 10 x 50mm Flat Bar
Post, all fastening accessories needed to complete work;
Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: Veranda, Roof
Garden; Building 12)
1051 (5) y.2 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 50mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: Main Stair; Building
12)
1051 (5) z.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
Top Rail with 2-38mm Ø Sub Railing; 38mm Ø Post, all
fastening accessories needed to complete work;
H=900mm (Location: Main Stair, Building 12.2)
1051 (5) z.2 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
H=900mm (Location: Main Stair, Building 12.2)
1051 (5) z.3 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 50mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: Railings @ Balcony,
Building 12.2)
1051 (5) aa.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
H=900mm (Location: Terrace, Building 13)
1051 (5) bb.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
Page | 297
1051 (5) cc.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
1051 (5) dd.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
H=900mm (Location: Service Stairs, Building 17A)
H=900mm (Location: Entrance Stairs, Building 17A)
H=900mm (Location: Balcony, Building 17A)
1051 (5) ee.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
H=900mm (Location: Service Stairs, Building 17B)
H=900mm (Location: Entrance Stairs, Building 17B)
H=900mm (Location: Balcony, Building 17B)
1051 (5) ff.1 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: Fire
Exit Stair 1 & 2 , Building 18)
1051 (5) ff.2 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
complete work; Painted Finish H=1200mm (Location: Fire
Exit Stair 1 & 2 , Building 18)
Page | 298
1051 (5) ff.3 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø l.m.
needed to complete work; H=900mm (Location: Entry
Steps and PWD Ramps, Building 18)
1051 (5) ff.4 Wall Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail, Metal l.m.
Bracket and 9.5MB with Expansion Shield, all fastening
accessories needed to complete work; Painted Finish
H=900mm (Location: Fire Exit Stair 1 & 2 , Building 18)
1051 (5) ff.5 Floor Mounted Metal Railings, includes Metal Tubular l.m.
Handrail, 50 x 10mm thk Vertical Main Support, 38 x
10mm thk Horizontal Steel Plate, 38 x 10mm thk Vertical
Decorative Steel Plate Painted Finish and all fastening
accessories to complete work; Painted Finish; Size=
6800mm L x 1050mm H (Location: Railings @ Balcony,
2nd to 5th Floor, Building 18)
1051 (5) ff.6 Floor Mounted Metal Railings, includes Metal Tubular l.m.
Handrail, 50 x 10mm thk Vertical Main Support, 38 x
10mm thk Horizontal Steel Plate, 38 x 10mm thk Vertical
Decorative Steel Plate Painted Finish and all fastening
accessories to complete work; Painted Finish; Size=
1275mm L x 1050mm H (Location: Railings @ Laundry
Area, 2nd to 5th Floor, Building 18)
1051 (5) jj.1 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 50mm Ø l.m.
Top Rail with1-50mm Ø Sub-railing; 50mm Ø Pipe Post,
needed to complete work; Painted Finish H=900mm
(Location: Main Entry Stairs & PWD Ramp, Building 39)
1051 (5) jj.2 Floor Mounted Stainless Steel Pipe Railings, 50mm Ø l.m.
Top Rail with1-50mm Ø Sub-railing; 50mm Ø Pipe Post,
all fastening accessories needed to complete work;
Painted Finish H=900mm (Location: PWD Ramp @ GL 7-
8/B, Building 39)
1051 (5) jj.3 Floor Mounted Metal Railings, 50 x 100mm Top Rail with l.m.
Stainless Steel Cable Wire Sub-railing; 50 x 50mm
Tubular Steel Post, all fastening accessories needed to
complete work; Painted Finish H=950mm (Location: Main
Entry, Building 39)
Tubular Steel Post, Stainless Steel Escutcheon, all
Page | 299
fastening accessories needed to complete work; Painted

Finish H=950mm (Location: Entry Stairs @ GL 1/A & GL
1/G, Building 39)
1051 (5) jj.5 Floor Mounted Metal Railings, 50 x 75m Top Rail with 2- l.m.
25x50mm Tubulat Steel Sub-railing; 50 x 50mm Tubular
Steel Post, Stainless Steel Escutcheon, all fastening
H=950mm (Location: Stairs 39-104, Building 39)
H=950mm (Location: Spiral Stairs, Building 39)
H=950mm (Location: Entry Stairs @ GL 2/B & GL 2/F,
Building 39)
Tubular Steel Post, Stainless Steel Escutcheon, all
fastening accessories needed to complete work; Painted
Finish H=950mm (Location: Ballustrade @ Podium,
Building 39)
1051 (5) kk.1 Floor Mounted G.I. Pipe Railings, 38mm Ø Top Rail with l.m.
complete work; Painted Finish H=970mm (Location: Entry
Steps and PWD Ramp, Building 59)
1051 (7) a.1 16mm Thk Tempered Glass Railing with 1-50mm x l.m.
100mm Stainless Steel Top Rail, including all fastening
accessories needed to complete work. H= 1000mm
Page | 300
ITEM 1053 CARPET TILE FLOORING
1053.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of carpet tile
flooring as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions
for each type of carpet tile material and installation accessory required. Include methods
of installation for each type of substrate.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet tile layout, clearly
indicating carpet tile direction, pattern direction (if applicable), placement of cut tiles,
and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing
walls/partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cut-outs are required in carpet tile.
Show installation details at any special conditions.
Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer’s standard size samples
and color yarns showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type
of carpet tile required.
1.2.3 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following:
1.2.4.1 Actual samples of each type of carpet tile pattern module required.
1.2.4.2 150 mm long samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
1.2.4 Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work.
1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than three (3)
years of production experience, who’s published literature, clearly indicates general
compliance of products with requirements of this section.
1.3.2 Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet tile installation with not less
than two (2) years of experience in installation of carpet tile similar to that required
for this project.
1.3.3 Single Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer
Page | 301
for each carpet tile type.
1.4.1 Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly
labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard
classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and
containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, humidity, laid flat, blocked-off ground to prevent sagging and warping.
1.4.2 Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special

delivery, storage, and handling requirements.
1.5 Sequencing and Scheduling
1.5.1 Sequence carpet tile with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
during remainder of construction period.
1.5 Warranty
1.6.1 Special Project Warranty: Submit a written Warranty executed by the Contractor,
Installer, and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpet tiling which fails in
materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be
in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1.6.1.1 Warranty period is two (2) years after the date of substantial completion.
1.6 Maintenance
1.7.1 Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for maintenance of

installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum
condition under anticipated traffic ad use conditions. Include precautions against
materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.7.2 Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than 5% of each type,
color, and pattern of carpet tiling, exclusive of material required to properly
complete installation. Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement
materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 General: The following carpet tile data shall be as selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer’s standard range.
Page | 302
2.1.1.1 Pile Material: 100% nylon 6.6
2.1.1.2 Carpet Tile Construction File: Flocked textile floor covering
2.1.1.3 File Density: 80 million/m2
2.1.1.4 Total Thickness: 5.3 mm
2.1.1.5 Pile Face Weight: Approx. 4.5 kg/m2
2.1.1.6 Tile Size: 500 mm x 500 mm
2.1.1.7 Backing material: Resilient waterproof backing carpet shall be similar to Flotex
carpet by Fameline.
2.2 Carpet Tile Accessories
2.2.1 Installation Adhesive: Releasable type adhesive as recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer and which complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet tile.
2.2.2 Carpet Edge Guard, Metallic: Extruded aluminum bend-down type edge guard wit
concealed gripper teeth and minimum 38 mm wide anchorage flange and minimum
16 mm wide face flange. Provide with anodized aluminum finish of colors as
selected by the Architect from standard colors available with the manufacturer.
2.2.3 Miscellaneous Materials: A recommended by the manufacturer of carpet tile and

selected by installer to meet project circumstances and requirements.
3.1 Pre-installation Requirements
3.1.1 Installation Adhesive: Releasable type adhesive as recommended by carpet tile

manufacturer and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet
tile.
3.1.2 Carpet Edge Guard, Metallic: Extruded aluminum bend-down type edge guard with
concealed gripper teeth and minimum 38 mm wide anchorage flange and minimum 16
mm wide face flange. Provide with anodized aluminum finish of colors as selected by
the Architect, from standard colors available with the manufacturer.
3.1.3 Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by the manufacturer of carpet tile and

selected by Installer to meet project circumstances and requirements.
Page | 303
3.2.1 Examine substrates for moisture content to verify a maximum allowable 65% corrective
measure as required if moisture content exceeds 65%.
3.2.2 Examine substrates for alkalinity. Corrective measures are required if pH reading is
greater than 10.
3.2.3 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2.4 Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to
receive carpet tile; apply sealer to prevent dusting.
3.2.5 Patch all holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish was chemically stripped,
re-seal concrete. Seal all powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet
tile manufacturer.
3.3 Installation
3.3.1 General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for direction
of carpet tile; maintain uniformity of carpet tile direction and lay of pile.
3.3.2 Extend carpet tile under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and
furnishings, and into alcoves of each space, or as otherwise indicated.
3.3.3 Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate.
3.3.4 Determine the center of the room using standard tile laying methods. The center chalk
lines, dividing the room into quadrants, should be off-center, if necessary, to ensure that
perimeter modules will be half-size or larger.
3.3.5 On both sides of chalk-line, apply a strip of adhesive at least 228 mm in width, using a
twist-textured paint roller. When adhesive is a ready, lay module firmly along these
anchor lines. Fill in each quadrant section laying using the “stair step” technique,
completing the installation from center to corner of room in each quadrant, then moving
to the next quadrant.
3.3.6 In large areas, a control grid of adhesive should be laid every 3000 mm as control of the
uniformity of the installation.
3.3.7 As each module is installed, ensure that the installation remains square and conforms to
chalk lines.
3.3.8 Adhere perimeter tiles and cut tiles with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit all cut tiles
and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut.
Page | 304
3.4 Cleaning
3.4.1 Remove and dispose of debris, cartoons and unusable tile scraps.
3.4.2 Remove spots and smears of adhesive from carpet surface with approved cleaning agent.
Replace any tile which cannot be cleaned.
3.4.3 Vacuum carpet using commercial machine. Remove any protruding face yarns with
sharp scissors.
3.5 Protection
3.5.1 Advice the contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpet
tiles will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
3.6 Inspection
3.6.1 Upon completion of the installation and verify that work is complete, properly installed
and acceptable. Remove and replace all work not found acceptable at the installer’s
expense and to the satisfaction and acceptance of the Architect.
installed with carpet tile flooring and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Carpet tile flooring work is determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be
this Item.

NO.
1053 (1) a Carpet Floor Tile, 500 x 500 x 5.3mm thk. sq.m.
Page | 305
ITEM 1203 PASSENGER ELEVATOR
1203.1 DESCRIPTION
1.8 Scope
and performing labor necessary for the complete and proper installation of passenger
elevator as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.9 Submittal
1.2.1 Manufacturer’s Brochures and Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and
manufacturer’s brochures for approval before delivery of equipment and materials.
Drawings and brochures shall contain enough detailed information to determine that the
equipment conforms to the requirements of this specification.
1.2.2 Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Three (3) complete sets of bound operating and
maintenance instructions for the passenger elevator in manufacturer’s format shall be
furnished specifically for the installation. Operation portion may be detailed information,
relative to type, method, sequence of controls and operation, with illustrations to prevent
misinterpretation. Maintenance instructions shall include complete data for servicing
the complete system, lubricating, repairing, identification and ordering of all replacement
parts.
1.2.3 Wiring Diagrams and Sequence of Operations: Furnish four (4) sets of complete wiring
diagrams and sequence of operations showing the electrical connections and functions of
all apparatus connected with the passenger elevator, both in the hall and in the hoist way
at the time of final inspection. One set shall be plastic or glass covered, framed and
mounted in the passenger elevator. The other three sets shall be delivered to the Architect
and Owner.
All materials and equipment shall be new otherwise specified or indicated. The
equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture
and/or installation of this type of equipment. Working parts shall be accessible for
inspection, servicing and repair. Provide adequate means for the lubrication of wearing
parts that require lubrication.
2.1 Material
Passenger elevator shall be product of reliable and experienced manufacturers providing
Page | 306
the most up-to-date technology, safety, quality and regular service maintenance.
Acceptable passenger elevator manufacturers shall be KONE or approved equivalent.
2.1.1 Elevator Description
Model - Kone NMono Space (Machine room-less)

Rated load - ≤1000 kg
Number of persons - 12
Rated speed - ≤ 2.5 m/s
Travel - ≤ 120 m
Car entrances -1
Door type - CO
Door width - 900 mm
Door height - 2100 mm
Car internal height - 2300 mm
Car internal width - 1400 mm
Car internal depth - 1500 mm
Car type - SEC
Shaft internal width - 2120 mm
Shaft internal depth - 1885 mm
Minimum headroom height - 4500 mm
Minimum pit height - 2200 mm
3.1 Installation
Install passenger elevator in accordance with manufacturer’s standard instructions and

procedures. Installation shall comply with requirements and rules set by the public
authority of competent jurisdiction on passenger elevator. Testing and adjustments shall
be performed prior to final acceptance.
3.2 Final Inspection
After all necessary testing has been performed, the passenger elevator contractor shall
provide evidence of certification by a government authority for the project area, starting
that the passenger elevator safety has been tested and approved for use with the
equipment having the specific ratings indicated or specified.
All works performed under this Item shall be measured per unit actually installed with
passenger elevator and accepted to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Page | 307
Passenger elevator determined and provided in the Bill of Quantities shall be paid for
Item.
NO.
1203 (2) c Lift Elevator , 3 Cab, 4 Stops/Opeing (Location: lot

Building 1)
1203 (2) d Lift Elevator , 1 Cab, 5 Stops/Opeing (Location: lot

Building 18)
Page | 308

Architectural Technical Specifications Ph1 Pkg3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Architectural Technical Specifications Ph1 Pkg3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONSTRUCTION OF

Item No. Description Page No.

100 GENERAL PARAGRAPHS 1

ITEM 100 GENERAL PARAGRAPHS

1.1 Project Information

2.1 Proposed Material Submittals, Catalog Data and Samples

2.2.7 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance: Before delivery, manufacturer’s

2.2.8 Laboratory Reports: An independent testing agency will be selected to conduct

a. “Approved” – means that fabrication, manufacture or construction may

b. “Approved with Comments” – means that fabrication, manufacture or

ITEM 100 SOIL TREATMENT

Soil treatment shall be performed by an experienced pest control operator whose

1.4 Delivery and Storage

100.2 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Soil Treatment

Soil treatment shall be consistent with approved chemicals and concentrations.

2.1.1 Preferred and acceptable Products:

a. Bayer or approved equal

2.1.2 Preferred and acceptable Pest Control System:

a. Julant or approved equal

100.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Soil Conditions

Perform the work in such a manner as to provide uniform distribution of chemicals

100.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

100.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT

Payment shall be made under:

PAY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT

100 Soil Treatment sq.m.

ITEM 100 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.1.1 Types of Submittals

All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal Descriptions".

a. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and

b. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules,

c. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or

d. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure

1.2 Submittal Identification

Submittals required are identified by as follows:

1.2.4 Product Data

1.2.5.1 Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional

1.2.6 Design Data

1.2.7 Test Reports

1.2.7.3 Final acceptance test and operational test procedure

1.2.8.1 Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or

1.2.8.2 Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or subcontractor through

1.2.8.3 Confined space entry permits. Manufacturer's Instructions

1.2.8.4 Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material,

1.2.9 Factory test reports

1.2.10 Operation and Maintenance Data

1.2.10.1 Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals.

1.2.11 Closeout Submittals

1.2.11.1 Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or

1.2.12 As-built drawings

1.2.12.1 Posted operating instructions

1.2.13 Approving Authority

1.2.13.1 Person authorized to approve submittal.

1.3.2 Contractor Action Code and Action Code

Entries used will be as follows (others may be prescribed by Transmittal Form)

1.4 Procedures for Submittal

1.4.1 Reviewing, Certifying, and Approving Authority

1.4.1.1 Approving authority on submittals is QC manager unless otherwise specified for

a. Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of

b. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of Work;

b. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or

c. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply